JP6512211B2 - Pachinko gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  It is about a pachinko game machine.

  The pachinko game machine that is most widely spread at present is called "special symbol" (or main game symbol) on the display unit such as 7-segment when the game ball enters the start opening (start chucker). Symbol is variably displayed, and when the special symbol is in a specific mode (for example, “7”), the special gaming state in which the player has a higher profit state than the normal gaming state {the special winning opening in the closed state at the normal time It is a model of a type (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game of contents opened by a predetermined condition (a so-called attacker). Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol directly linked to the player's profit, it is called "decorative symbol" for effect to enhance the interest of the game separately from the "special symbol" described above. The symbol to be displayed is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in synchronization with the variation of the special symbol. Then, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also begins to change accordingly, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also according to this, a predetermined mode (for example, It will stop at "777". Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is determined by the decorative symbol being stopped in a predetermined manner.

  Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, how to devise a high level of interest with regard to overall production including the variation pattern of the above-mentioned pattern, in order to differentiate from other types. It is focused on whether to grant.

JP, 2015-211758, A JP, 2014-18512, A

  For example, an effect (so-called right-handed effect, left-handed effect, etc.) for instructing the player to increase or decrease the firing strength according to the progress of the game has been present in the past but is easy for the player to understand In order to achieve this, there is a need for further improvement.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A starting opening disposed in a predetermined game area;
A ball entry port where the game ball can enter the ball, the game ball flowing down the second area side being disposed at a position where the ball entry is easier than the game ball flowing down the first area side,
A main gaming unit that controls the progress of the game;
An information display unit capable of displaying information;
And an auxiliary game unit that controls information display on the information display unit;
The main game club is
In response to entering the starting opening, the special symbol display is executed on the special symbol display device.
A special game can be executed when the special symbol of the predetermined aspect is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device,
Based on the state of the game, it is possible to generate recommended launch information, which is information related to which of the first zone and the second zone should launch the game ball, and send it to the secondary gaming unit,
The secondary gaming unit is
Game information receiving means for receiving recommended launch information transmitted from the main gaming unit;
Based on the recommended firing information received by the gaming information receiving means, firing the first notification image, which is the game information that can be notified to shoot the gaming ball toward the first area side, and the gaming ball towards the second area side The launch position notification control is configured to be executable to display on the information display unit a second notification image that is game information that can be notified to
The main game unit is recommended launching at least once at a time after the variation display of one special symbol is started, and until the variation display of the special symbol to be performed next to the variation display of the one special symbol is started. Generate information and send it to the secondary gaming unit,
The secondary game unit has generated a predetermined game result from the main game unit after the launch position notification control is executed based on the reception of the current recommended launch information until the next recommended launch information is received. Control to make it possible to change the display content in the information display unit related to the first notification image or the second notification image even when the information indicating that the second notification image has been received,
In the case where the secondary gaming unit receives, as the predetermined game result, information relating to the generation of a game result that can be identified as emitting at a position different from the recommended launch position indicated by the recommended launch information received earlier, In the information display unit, the alerting effect relating to the notification content for notifying the player that the recommended launch position is different can be executed.
When the secondary gaming portion changes the display related to the execution of the alerting effect, to the predetermined display mode in which the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol, which is the decorative identification information corresponding to the special symbol, change in advance, In the non-display mode ,
The predetermined display mode is configured to include when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol variation in which the pseudo continuous variation effect is executed <br / > A pachinko game machine characterized by
<Supplementary Note>
In addition, although listed about another aspect different from this aspect below, it is possible to implement without being limited to these at all.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A game ball which is capable of entering the game ball, which is disposed at a position where the game ball flowing down the second area side is easier to enter than the game ball which flows down the first area side (for example, 2 main game start port B10),
A game winning ball in which the game area flowing down on the second area side is located at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down on the first area side. For example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20),
An identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying identification information;
And an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on entering the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10);
Identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display identification information after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition unit When,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, whether or not there is a predetermined number of entry into the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) A special game capable of executing a special game that can make a unit game advantageous for the player to make a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) advantageous until a predetermined period has elapsed And control means,
As the gaming state, it is configured to be able to adopt a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which entry to the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is easier than in the normal gaming state.
While the special game is being executed, a notification image capable of notifying that the game ball is emitted toward the second area can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The display mode of the notification image includes at least a first mode and a second mode which is a display mode different from the first mode,
When the display of the notification image is started during the special game, the display mode of the notification image is displayed in the first mode, and the predetermined number is displayed when the notification image is displayed in the first mode. The notification image is configured to be displayed in the second mode in response to entry into the less variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) It is a pachinko game machine.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present aspect, when performing the effect of instructing the player to the strength of the emission intensity, it is possible to achieve an effect that the player can easily understand.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main gaming symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of an initial process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of hold information management processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of a first suggestion effect execution control process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a second suggestion effect execution control process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of an initialization process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of a first suggested effect execution control process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flow chart of second suggestion effect execution control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 31 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of emission instruction display unit control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of a motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of limit frequency A variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of limit frequency B fluctuation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a configuration diagram of a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is an example of the content of a firing instruction command on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of right-handed image display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of left-handed image display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of a motorized product drive drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of a game assistance effect display control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 64 is a flowchart of a notification image display control process during a special game on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 65 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of a special game notification image display control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of standby demonstration display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 69 is a standby demonstration image view in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of notification image confirmation processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of right-handed image display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of left-handed image display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of right-turn warning display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of left hit warning display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the seventh embodiment. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of standby demonstration display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a waiting demo image FIG. 2 in the pachinko gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of firing position notification control processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a flowchart of a movable object service drive control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 84 shows an example of a notification image instruction command in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 85 is an illustration of a feature avoidance notification image in the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a notification image image view in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. The term "entry" includes not only winnings where the winning balls are paid out, but also passing to "through chuckers" where there is no winning balls paid out. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as it can identify the type of information through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but preferably it is visual, eg, numbers, letters, symbols And the like. In addition, in the present specification, "identification information" may be referred to as a main gaming symbol / special symbol (special drawing) or a decorative symbol (graphic drawing), but "special symbol (special drawing)" is a main control board It is identification information whose display is controlled on the side, and "decorative symbol (dressing)" is identification information as an effect displayed on the side of the sub control board. “Identifiable information can be displayed” is not limited to any display method. For example, light emission of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7 segments) (including not only the presence or absence of light but also the difference in color), physical Display (for example, stop display of a symbol drawn on a reel band at a predetermined position) and the like can be mentioned. "Effect" refers to display content that enhances the interest of a game, and includes, for example, identification information change, stop, notice, etc., moving images and pictures such as animations and live-actions, still images such as pictures, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. The "opened state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = no prize in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called, attacker). It will be easy. Also, for example, a state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an advanced state) projected from the game board (the player side) and a state (hereinafter referred to as the retracted state) retracted into the game board (opposite to the player side) In a configuration (so-called Vero type attacker) capable of taking the above condition, the advancing state = the winning easy state, and the retreating state = the winning non-easiness state. The "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko gaming machine, and includes pseudo random numbers in addition to narrow random numbers (for example, hard as random numbers Random number, soft random number as pseudo random number). For example, the so-called "basic random number" affecting the outcome of the game, specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning lottery)" associated with the transition of the special game, the variation pattern (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined "Variation mode decision random number" for doing, "symbol decision random number" which decides stop pattern, and "per hit symbol decision random number" which decides whether or not to shift to specific game (for example probability fluctuation game) after special game be able to. When determining the content of the variation mode or the content of the fixed identification information, it is not necessary to use all these random numbers, and at least one random number which is the same as or different from each other may be used. In addition, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once in the entrance (for example, starting entrance) which is a trigger for acquiring random numbers. The random number acquired by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as a winning random number + a variation mode determination random number + a symbol determination random number ... is referred to as a single random number) . Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also be another type of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The “gaming state” is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state from a non-probability fluctuation gaming state where the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Transition game state with high lottery probability, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning to start slot that becomes transition lottery to special game (so-called, normal symbol time reduction state, for example, variable members are attached to the start slot In the case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open winning probability of the variable member is high, the notification time of the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short, and so on. The “expected average execution time of easily enterable ball games per unit time” assumes a situation in which the symbol variation of the auxiliary gaming symbol is performed continuously (for example, the condition in which the suspension relating to the auxiliary gaming symbol always exists) In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting opening, but in terms of internal processing, in other words, based on the gaming state mentioned above, When the variable member is attached to the starting opening, long and short of the open period of the variable member (so-called open extension function operation state / non-operation state), winning of the ordinary symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member Probability high and low (so-called flat figure high probability state · low probability state), long and short variation time of the normal symbol (auxiliary game pattern) that triggers opening of the variable member (so-called flat figure fluctuation shortening function Operating condition-actuated state), is realized by any one or more combinations of the like.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 first type compound machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is within the scope when applied to other gaming machines (eg, conventional pachinko gaming machines such as conventional type 1, type 2, type 3 and general electronic combination). . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function of each means, the on / off timing of the flag, and the means name etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the embodiments and modifications described above should not be construed as limiting as applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table regarding various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. Furthermore, numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications {e.g. winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at special game, symbol fluctuation time, number of continuations in each gaming state, etc.} This is merely an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, the conditions of the first main game side and the second main game side, the conditions of the probability change game and the non-probability change game, time reduction game and the non-probability change game) It is understood that the size relationship and combination of the numerical values shown in the conditions for the time reduction game, etc. may be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modifications. Should. For example, on the first main game side and the second main game side, the winning probability at the time of lottery execution and the magnitude relationship in the expected value of the maximum round number at the special game time are: first main game side = second main game side Even if it is illustrated as such, the magnitude relationship may be appropriately changed such that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side. Good (other figures, same for conditions). Also, for example, when configuring as the number of continuations of the probability variation gaming state based on the purport of continuing until the next big hit occurs, does “65535” be set as the number of continuations (constructed so as to be substantially continued), Alternatively, even in the option of the realization method based on the same purpose of maintaining the probability fluctuation gaming state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, it does not greatly deviate from the spirit of the following embodiments and modifications. It should be understood that it may be changed as appropriate. Note that the time reduction gaming state according to the present example may be that the main game time short flag is on, or the auxiliary game time short flag may be on, and the main game time short flag and It may indicate a state in which the auxiliary game time short flag is on. The time reduction game state including the state where the auxiliary game time short flag is on may indicate that the open time extension function is operating. The time saving gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time shortening gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Also, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

  Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines are mainly composed of gaming machine slots and gaming boards. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper bowl D20, a lower bowl D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame aligned with the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be able to open and close via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board, a mechanism for guiding or recovering the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending out the game balls to the shooting rail, and removing the game balls from the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and removing game balls. In addition, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper bowl D20 and the lower bowl D22, and a sound effect corresponding to the game state or the like is output.

  Next, in the game board, a game area D30 partitioned by the outer rail D32 and the inner rail D34 is formed. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills not shown and various general winning openings, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10, an auxiliary game start opening H10, 1st large winning a prize opening C10, 2nd large winning a prize opening C20 (or it may be called distribution winning a prize opening C20), 1st main game symbol display A20, 2nd main game symbol display B20, effect display SG, An auxiliary game symbol display device H20, a center decoration D38 and an out port D36 are provided. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  Next, the first main game start port A10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 is provided with a first main game start port entering ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start slot entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the first main game start slot A10, and the first main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry Generate ball entry information.

  Next, the second main game start port B10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric role object B11d. Here, the second main game start slot entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the second main game start slot B10, and indicates the second main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry. Generate ball entry information. Next, the second main game start port electric role B11d changes into a closed state in which the game ball is less likely to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 are provided separately from each other, and the game flows down the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30. While the balls are easily guided to the first main game start opening A10 by a mechanism such as a plurality of game nails and a windmill not shown, they are configured so as not to be easily guided to the second main game start opening B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 is hard to be guided to the first main game start port A10 by the mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown) It is comprised so that it may be easy to be induced | guided | derived to game starting opening B10. In addition, "it is easy to be induced" and "it is hard to be induced" are determined by the size of the number of balls when 10000 balls are respectively emitted to the right and left sides of the game ball, for example.

  In the present embodiment, although the electric bonus is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric bonus is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the 1st main game starting opening A10 and the 2nd main game starting opening B10 are separated and arranged, it is not limited to this, either, 1st main game starting opening A10 and the 1st 2) The main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening are disposed in one unit which is disposed to overlap the main game start opening B10 in the vertical direction, or the entrance is made common and has a distribution mechanism inside B10 may be arranged side by side. In addition to the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10, it is possible to separately provide a third main game start port corresponding to either the first main game or the second main game. is there.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start slot entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start slot H10, and generates the auxiliary game start slot entrance information indicating the ball entry when entering the ball. Do. It should be noted that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric winning combination B11d of the second main game start port B10. In the present embodiment, the auxiliary game symbol is hit and stopped by stopping at the electric symbol (in the present embodiment, since it is provided in the second main game start port B10, the second main game start) Although the mouth electric character B11 d is provided in the second main game start opening, it may be provided in the first main game start opening and the third main game start opening described above (the part In this case, the electric role may be referred to as a first main game start opening electric role or a third main game start opening electric role).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 is unlikely to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area D30) Gaming balls that are flowing down) are configured to be easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10 {but not limited to this, about the gaming balls flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (with reference to the center of the game area) Also, it may be configured to be easily guided to the left auxiliary game start port separately provided in addition to the auxiliary game start port H10}.

  Next, a first large winning opening C10 and a second large winning opening C20 are provided above the out slot D36 (in particular, to the right of the gaming area D30), and the right side of the gaming area D30 (the middle of the gaming area The game ball flowing down the standard is configured to easily pass through the area where the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out port D36.

  Next, the first large winning opening C10 is in the form of a horizontal rectangle that opens when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) is stopped by the big hit symbol, and the out-port It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located above D36 (in particular, on the right side of the game area D30). Specifically, the first large winning opening C10 is a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the first large winning opening electric combination C11d (and the first large winning). And a mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first large winning opening winning combination detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entering ball information indicating the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The first big winning opening electric winning combination C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 to the first big winning opening C10 in the normal state where the gaming ball can not win or difficult to win and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win (first (1) The large winning opening solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in a normal state and an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, the plate-like member provided at the big winning opening takes out the advancing state in which the plate-like member protrudes in the closing direction of the opening of the big winning opening and the retracted state in which the plate member is retracted to the opposite side. The prize winning opening itself has a box-like member capable of receiving gaming balls that are so-called slide-type and that protrude from the gaming area D30 and flow down the gaming area D30, and are in the advanced state The large winning opening is closed by blocking the acceptance of the gaming ball to the box-like member, and the acceptance of the gaming ball to the box-like member is allowed in the retracted state. The winning opening may be in an open state), which is preferable when it is desired to secure a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the number of balls entering the large winning opening.

  Next, the second large winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located above the mouth D36 (in particular, on the right side of the gaming area D30). As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the second large winning opening electric combination C21d (and the second large winning A mouth solenoid C23), a specific area C22, and a specific area insertion detection device C22s. Here, the second large winning opening winning combination detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening entering ball information showing the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The specific area insertion detection device C22s is a sensor that detects the insertion of the gaming ball into the specific area C22, and generates specific area insertion information indicating the ball entry when the ball is entered. The gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by one of the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s and the specific area insertion detection device C22s. Next, the second big winning opening electric winning combination C21d, in the second big winning opening C20 the game ball can not be winning or difficult to win the normal state and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win the second big winning opening C20 Variable (The second large winning opening solenoid C23 is excited to change). In the present embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in a normal state and an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win. However, the slide-type attacker described above may be used. In addition, although not particularly illustrated in this example, the valve-like displacing between the first position where the game ball can easily enter the specific area C22 and the second position where the game ball does not easily enter the specific area C22 A shielding member may be provided (in this case, the opening and closing mode of the shielding member may be made different depending on the big hit symbol).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (the second main game) Is an apparatus that executes the displayed information. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and the first main game And a symbol hold display unit A21 h (a second main game symbol hold display unit B21 h). Here, the first main game symbol holding display area A21h (the second main game symbol holding display area B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game) Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol not being executed). In addition, 1st main game symbol display part A21g (2nd main game symbol display part B21g) is comprised by 7 segment LED, for example, and 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) is "0"-"9. "10" numbers displayed with "" and lost "-" {However, not limited to this, 7-segment LED is used to make it difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the number of reservations is not limited to four lamps, and the maximum number of reservations can be displayed (for example, one lamp can be displayed. Number 1: lighted, pending number 2: low-speed blinking, pending number 3: medium-speed blinking, pending number 4: high-speed blinking, if configured).

  In the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20), because the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) does not have to have a dramatic role. The size of is set so as not to be noticeable. However, when adopting a method in which the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) itself has an effective role and the first decorative symbol (the second decorative symbol) is not displayed, the effect to be described later The first main game symbol (second main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the display device SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes display or the like of an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the change display of the decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 is a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying main game hold information, and a moving image of a decorative symbol variation of a plurality of rows imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying the In the present embodiment, the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display, but may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 (and the second hold display unit SG13) is composed of four graphic image displays, and the hold display by the graphic images is interlocked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding the auxiliary gaming symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding display unit H21 h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of holdings on the auxiliary gaming side. In addition, although illustration is not carried out, it is possible to perform display on effect display apparatus SG also about the display regarding an auxiliary | assistant game symbol, and the display regarding an auxiliary | assistant game symbol holding | maintenance.

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a channel of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays an effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the entire operation of the pachinko game machine, and in particular, controls the entire game operation such as lottery when entering the first main game start port A10 (second main game start port B10) (ie, the game Control board M that performs control directly related to the benefit of the person and effect control means (sub main control unit, etc.) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that imparts interest to the game content Sub main board (also referred to as sub main board) SM, sub sub control unit (also referred to as sub sub sub board) SS that mainly performs effect display, prize ball tank KT, prize ball rail KR, and prize winning on each winning opening Control the payout operation by the payout ball dispensing device (set base) KE including the payout unit KE10 etc. that dispenses the game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT to the upper bowl plate D20 according to the A ball payout control board KH, a launcher D42 for launching the game balls (storage balls) of the upper bowl D20 into the game area D30 one ball at a time, a launch control board D40 for controlling the launch operation of the launcher D42, and a pachinko game A power supply unit E for supplying power to each part of the machine and a power switch Ea which is a switch for turning on and off the power of the pachinko gaming machine are provided on the back of the front frame D14 (opposite to the game side).

  Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, the payout of gaming balls is performed based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M to control the award ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative symbol, sound from the speaker D24, A sub control board S (in this example, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are disposed on one board) which controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26 and the execution of an error notification etc. And a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board. Here, the sub control board S controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative symbol, sounds from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and an error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that executes display processing such as variation display / stop display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device SG, suspension display, and advance notice display. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub main control unit SM, and the sub sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that pre-stores a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, A RAM that temporarily stores data handled by the computer (such as various data generated during a game and a computer program read from a ROM), and a backup area (and backup power supply) for holding information at the time of power interruption ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM has a real time clock RTC which keeps clocking the current time by the built-in power supply.

  Here, the real time clock RTC is an apparatus (integrated circuit) for clocking provided on the substrate of the sub main control unit SM. The real time clock RTC has a separate power supply (battery) independent of the power supply to the CPU on the board, and is set at the time of factory shipment etc. in order to continue clocking while power supply to the gaming machine is not being performed. It is possible to supply the current date / time based on the date / time that was However, the real-time clock RTC is clocked by the vibration of the quartz, like a general quartz clock, and is therefore affected by the vibration, low temperature and high temperature, and every game machine equipped with the real-time clock RTC per day An error of about 0.3 to 2.0 seconds may occur.

  The outline configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection between each substrate and device will be outlined below. First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {the aforementioned first main game start opening ball insertion detection device A11s, the second main game start opening ball insertion detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening ball insertion detection device H11s, the first (1) Large winning opening winning detection device C11s, second large winning opening winning detection device C21s, general winning detection device (although not shown, the general entrance is always open regardless of whether the special game is performed or not And there is a prize ball, but it is a ball entrance which does not perform symbol lottery etc.), drive solenoids (not shown) (the above-mentioned first big winning hole solenoid C13, second big winning hole solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (Not shown), etc., game peripherals (the first main game peripheral A, the second main game peripheral B, the first and second main games shared in the figure, which are input / output devices that are essential for the progress of the game) Peripheral device C, auxiliary gaming peripheral device H) and electricity It is connected to, and controls the progress of the game based on the input signals from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the winning ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub main control unit SM and sub sub control unit SS), and based on the game progress, the prize balls are paid out. The information (commands) relating to etc. is configured to be able to be transmitted to the winning ball payout control board KH, and the information (commands) relating to the presentation / playing state of the game etc to the sub control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like through an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected by wiring with the hall computer HC through the external connection terminal. Is configured to output game related information to an external device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable two-way communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub main control unit SM (the communication method may use either serial communication or parallel communication). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls and a device that can be operated by a player, and receives a request for lending of game balls and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R to be transmitted. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit (the launch control board D40) of the launcher is juxtaposed in the prize ball delivery control board KH, and the prize ball delivery control board KH and the launcher D42 ( It is also connected to the launch handle, launch motor, ball feed device, etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is adopted separately as a form adjacent to the game machine, but may be integrated with the game machine, in which case, it is rented by the prize ball payout control board KH. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, as described above, the sub control board S displays the decoration display etc. as described above, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other driving devices for effects (not shown, but so-called effects And movable motors and solenoids). In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are provided in the sub control substrate S, and the control of sound to be output from the speaker D24 by the sub main control unit SM Lighting control of the lamp D26 and control of determination of display content to be displayed on the effect display device SG are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device SG is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured to be In the present embodiment, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub control substrate S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate substrate Although it may be possible, a merit of being able to reduce the situation where noise mixes in space merit, wiring, etc. arises by being configured to be integrated. Further, the work assignment in both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable in the case where a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP is adopted). Also, electronic value may be given without giving a physical award ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), The sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) involved in the effect, a prize ball payout control board KH performing payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M, and information communicably connected ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps) and the speakers D24. It is connected. Furthermore, the prize ball payout control substrate KH is electrically connected to a prize ball dispenser KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. And ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. The respective units included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (apparatus) will be described.

  The “random number” in the claims and the present specification may be, for example, “0” to “65535” (2-byte random number) or the like allocated according to the type of random number (for example, winning random number or variation mode determination random number) It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255” (1-byte random number), “0” to “999”. The random number is not limited to a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo random number generated by hardware random number, software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method (plus one method) in which the values are sequentially expressed along the random number sequence, the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value There may be mentioned a method (initial value update method) in which)) is determined by a value having chance, a combination of these, and the like.

  In addition, with the limited frequency, a specific symbol (such as a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, etc., a symbol that a special electric symbol will be activated) is displayed in a stopped state, and it is determined in advance after the special electric symbol has finished its operation. The type and / or the selection rate of the variation mode of the main gaming symbol in a certain period (there may be a plurality of periods) is changed, and is controlled by one or more fluctuations in the above-mentioned predetermined period (limited Frequency condition). Moreover, the lottery table for fluctuation mode determination referred to when determining the fluctuation mode according to the main gaming symbol in the limited frequency state is referred to as the limited frequency table, and the limited frequency table may have a plurality of types, The limited frequency table to be referred to is switched according to the type of the specific symbol that triggered the operation of the special electric character and the number of changes of the main gaming symbol after the end of the special game. In addition, switching from a state where it is referred to as the limited frequency table A (also referred to as a limited frequency A state) to a state where it is referred to as the limited frequency table B (also referred to as a limited frequency B state) It is limited to switch to the state of referring to the limited frequency table B via the state (normal state) using the common variation mode determination lottery table commonly used in the current gaming state from the state in which you are playing It states that the frequency state is transitioning. In addition, the limited frequency state may be configured to have a plurality in one gaming state, and the limited frequency state may be configured to transition in a plurality of times in one gaming state. When the variation mode of the main gaming symbol is determined with reference to the limited frequency table, the selection rate of the variation mode is differentiated with reference to the common limited frequency table (that is, the variation mode itself to be selected is Method that is the same, but the selectivity is different (or the variation mode and selectivity to be selected are the same, but another fixed value is added to the variation time value according to the selected variation mode ) May be adopted.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) which can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game start opening electric combination open timer MP22t-B that measures the drive (open) time of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d. There is. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a winning ball counter MP33c that measures winning balls to the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a probability variation counter MP51c capable of counting the probability variation number, and a time reduction counter MP52c capable of counting the time reduction number. Here, the “specific game” is, for example, a probability fluctuation game in which the lottery probability for the special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time reduction game in which the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game, Furthermore, it refers to the auxiliary gaming time short game state (open extension state) related to the second main game start opening electric combination (sometimes referred to as a normal electric combination).

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol is relatively shortened compared to the non-time shortening gaming in progress (time shortening function). Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the open time of the second main game start opening electric power unit B11d is relatively extended (open time extension function). In addition, the time shortening game in the present embodiment is ended when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main gaming symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main gaming symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the time reduction number is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has, for example, a function to perform a transfer lottery from a specific game (for example, a probability change game or a time reduction game) to a normal game at a predetermined probability every time the symbol changes. Good (in the case of a so-called pachinko game machine with a falling lottery function).

  Next, gaming peripherals will be described. Note that some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, so the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the gaming peripherals are a first main gaming peripheral A which is a peripheral of the first main gaming side, a second main gaming peripheral B which is a peripheral of the second main gaming side, and a first main gaming side The first and second main game common peripheral device C, which is a common peripheral device on the second main game side, an auxiliary game peripheral device H regarding an auxiliary game, a sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, and a sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like are included. Here, the effects controlled by the sub main control unit SM include the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the variation of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol, in the result of the game. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A is a first main game start port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can perform stop display and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B is a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of the second main game start port B10, which is a trigger for transition to a special game, and the second main game symbol stop display and variable display. And.

  Next, the first and second main game common peripheral devices C are in the closed state at the time of the normal game, and in the special game (big hit), the first big winning opening C10 which is opened under the predetermined condition The second large winning opening C20, and the second large winning opening C20 which is in the closed state at the time of normal gaming, and in the open state at predetermined conditions in the case of the sorting game.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming peripheral device H is an auxiliary gaming start opening H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d of the second main game starting opening B10, and a stop indication and change indication of the auxiliary gaming symbol. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 that can be played.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG which displays an image concerning the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub sub control unit ) SS is connected to the secondary game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control Means (sub main control unit) means to be controlled by SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  Next, FIG. 4 is a main flow chart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. That is, after power on of the gaming machine, after initialization (not shown, initialization of the register, setting of input / output port, etc. is performed), CPUMC of the main control board M is RAM in step 1002. The input port of the clear button is confirmed, and whether or not the reset button (RAM clear button) of the power supply unit E is operated, that is, the manager of the game arcade intentionally performs an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. It is determined whether or not it is. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB). Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits, to the sub main control unit SM, ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared (sent at that timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and may be configured to be transmitted in a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, it is stored in the checksum and RAM area recorded at power off) Compare with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, based on the check result, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the contents of the RAM are not normal (that is, whether the information at the time of power failure is backed up in the RAM). Do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the above-described RAM clear process). On the other hand, if the result of step 1010 is No, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, then in step 1012, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores power (back up) in the RAM of the main control board M In step 1014, the acquired various information command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side (it may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or the command is set at the relevant timing, which will be described later. It may be configured to transmit in the control command transmission process), and the process proceeds to the process of step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M triggers an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is allowed to be T) and as a result {(b) of FIG. Transition. Note that after execution of the process of step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processes (for example, an increment process of the random number counter) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The CPU MC of the main control board M executes the processing of FIG. 7B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt cycle T (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later in step 1100. . Next, in step 1200, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a motorized product drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1500, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes special game control processing described later. Next, in step 1910, the main control board M (especially the winning ball payout determination means MH) performs a winning ball payout control process (drive control of the winning ball payout device KE, etc.) A process for causing the payout control board KH to execute and managing the result is executed. Next, in step 1920, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes output processing of an external signal (output of information to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC or the like). Next, in step 1930, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes control command transmission processing (sends the command set in each of the above-described processing to the sub main control unit side), and immediately before execution of this interrupt processing. Return to the process being executed.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is executed. That is, when the game machine is powered off (in this example, NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets power-off time information (for example, checksum) based on the information of the RAM area. . Next, in step 1022, the CPU MC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area and prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to a power-off wait loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, at step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (flow in, in the case of a gate, passage). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1103, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an information to the effect that entry of the game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10 has been detected. The command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1930). Next, in step 1104, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of holding balls is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the holding ball in the form of setting the random number together with the information indicating the number of the holding, and the next processing (processing of step 1200) Migrate to Also in the case of No in steps 1102 and 1104, the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the motorized prize drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, at step 1202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the motor-operated combination open flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1204 whether or not the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag is off. If Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary game pattern. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the gaming state on the auxiliary gaming side (flag state of the auxiliary gaming time short flag) and the lottery table MN41ta-H for auxiliary gaming symbol determination. Determine the stop symbol based on the acquired auxiliary gaming side gaming state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the holding ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time short flag is on, compared to the case where it is off) The winning symbol is selected with high probability) and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M.

  Here, the right in the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the same table, in this example, the stop symbols "D0, D1, D2" are present, and the stop symbols to be hit symbols are "D1, D2", which are caused by the respective stops. The opening mode of the motorized prize that is to be opened is (0.2 seconds open → closed) when the stopped symbols are “D1, D2” at the time of non-time shortening game. In addition, in the time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed) and stopped When the design is "D2", the opening mode is configured to be (0.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed). In addition, in the case of non-time reduction game time (when the auxiliary game time short flag is off), the stop symbol tends to be the lost symbol “D0”, and in the time reduction game time (when the auxiliary game time short flag is on) The stop symbol is formed so that the table of acceptance lottery concerning the auxiliary game is different in each gaming state so that it is easy to hit the symbol "D1" (operation presence or absence of the auxiliary game probability change function).

  Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation time to the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (flag state of the auxiliary gaming time short flag). The predetermined time relating to (for example, 1 second if the auxiliary game short flag is on, 5.5 seconds if the auxiliary game short flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts one from the holding ball relating to the auxiliary game pattern, and then updates the hold information recorded in the RAM area of the main control board M and the auxiliary game pattern. After starting the change management timer MP11t-H, the variable display of the auxiliary game symbol is started on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-H to determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the supplementary gaming symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol in step 1226, and the stop symbol of the acquired auxiliary game symbol is determined and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Do. Then, at step 1228, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag.

  Next, in step 1230, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary gaming symbol is "hit" (in this example, D1 or D2). In the case of Yes in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1232 is in the opening mode (for example, in the case of hitting symbol “D1” in time shortening game) based on the hitting symbol and playing state on the auxiliary gaming side. Is 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → open mode that becomes closed, in the case of hit "D2", open for 0.2 seconds, closed for 0.8 seconds, An open mode in which open → closed for 4.0 seconds is determined, and a predetermined time relating to the open time (open / close time) of the electric bonus is set in the second main game start port electric bonus open timer MP22t-B. Next, in step 1234, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the motor-operated accessory open flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts the second main game start opening electric combination open timer MP22t-B, and then opens the second main game start opening electric combination B11d.

  Next, in step 1242, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the second main game start opening electric combination opening timer MP22t-B, and the second main game start opening electric combination B11d relates to a predetermined time Determine if time has been reached. If the result of step 1242 is YES, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game start port electric role object B11 d in step 1244 and step 1246, and the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. The motorized product open flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If NO at step 1202, the process goes to step 1242, and if NO at step 1204, the process goes to step 1224. If NO at step 1206, step 1224, step 1230 and step 1242, the next process is performed. It transfers to (the process of step 1300).

  Moreover, in this flowchart, after the stop symbol display in step 1226 for convenience, although it transfers to the following step immediately after, it is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to shift to the next process after the stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing the branch process using the stop display fixed flag and the timer). Is achievable). By performing control in this manner, it is possible to provide a sufficient time for the player to visually recognize that the game has been dropped in the auxiliary game when the dropped symbol "D0" has been stopped. In addition, since the display of the hit symbol continues during operation of the electric part, when the hit symbol stops, the stop display fixed time is shorter than at the time of the detached symbol stop, and the stop display fixed time is not It is also conceivable to smooth the progress of the game by doing this.

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, at step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the first main game start opening information from the first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start opening A10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M is information indicating that the ball entry of the game ball into the first main game start port A10 has been detected, the first main game start entry The sphere detection command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1930).

  Next, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of holding balls for the main game (particularly, the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1306, in step 1308, the CPUMC of the main control board M obtains a first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as a first main game content determination random number, a random lottery random number for determining success or failure, a symbol lottery random number for determining a symbol when hit, and a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols are determined. Three random numbers of variation mode lottery random number to be acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, respectively, and are obtained sequentially at this timing. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1312, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets information (hold generation command) related to the acquired first main game random number to the command transmission buffer MT 10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM ( It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1930).

  Next, at step 1322, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start opening ball insertion information from the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10 Determine If Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the CPUMC of the main control board M is information indicating that the ball entry of the game ball to the second main game start port B10 has been detected, a second main game start opening entry The sphere detection command is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1930).

Next, in step 1326, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of holding balls relating to the main game (particularly, the second main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1326, in step 1328, the CPUMC of the main control board M obtains a second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of a winning lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation aspect lottery random number are acquired similarly to the first main game content determination random number. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the lottery random number for the first main game and the lottery random number for the second main game Acquisition range of) is set to the same. Next, in step 1330, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1332, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the command transmission buffer MT 10 for transmitting information (hold occurrence command) related to the acquired second main game random number to the sub main control unit SM ( It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1930), and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1400). If NO in step 1302 and step 1306, the process proceeds to step 1322, and if NO in step 1322 and step 1326, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

  In the present embodiment, the information related to the acquired random number is transmitted as the information to be transmitted to the sub main control unit SM in step 1312 and step 1332. However, for example, information of the random number and the main game symbol The number of reservations may be attached and transmitted, and these information can be substituted as information indicating that a random number has been acquired.

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flow chart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, at step 1401, the CPU MC of the main control board M checks whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. If Yes in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process described later in step 1400 (1), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1500). On the other hand, if No in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main gaming symbol display process described later in step 1400 (2), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1500).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning sequence is the first main game symbol) The second main game symbol is configured to be prioritized and executed, but it is not limited to this. May be configured to execute a parallel lottery that randomly draws).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to a subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this processing is substantially the same processing on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is not during special game (or during operation of the condition device), and is not during main game symbol change, and withholding of the main game symbol corresponding to the present processing (first main game symbol display In the case of processing, it is a condition that there is a hold on the first main game. Moreover, in this flowchart, after the stop symbol display in step 1423 for convenience, although it transfers to the following step immediately after, it is not limited to this. In that case, a variation fixed time of about 500 ms (a time for stopping and displaying the final display symbol after the final display of the main gaming symbol) is provided, and the variation start condition of the next variation is not satisfied during the fixed variation time. It may be configured to shift to the next processing after the fluctuation fixed time (for example, this processing can be achieved by performing the branch processing using the flag and timer during the fluctuation fixed time). By performing control in this manner, it is possible to provide a time in which the player can sufficiently visually recognize that the main game has become out of place when the out-of-pattern has stopped. In addition, since the display of the big hit symbol (or small hit symbol) continues during the large hit (or small hit), when the big hit symbol (or small hit symbol) is stopped, the off symbol is stopped than at the stop It is also conceivable to smooth the progress of the game by shortening the fluctuation fixed time or eliminating the fluctuation fixed time.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M in step 1405 and step 1406, and the first main game content determination random number related to symbol variation this time ( The second main game content determination random number) is read out and deleted from the RAM area of the main control board M, and each of the storage areas of the remaining temporarily stored information temporarily stored is shifted (hold-up process). Next, in step 1410-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to a first main game pass / fail lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game pass / fail lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state. The first main game content determination random number (the second main game content determination random number) (in particular, the winning lottery random number), to execute the main gaming symbol acceptance lottery.

  Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game use lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game use lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability variation gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot probability in the non-probability variation gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, the process of changing the gaming state {probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening gaming state (main game short flag on / off, auxiliary game short flag on / off)} is not performed. Although so-called small hits are not illustrated, small hits may be generated (a small hit is won).

  Next, in step 1410-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the first main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (the second main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), Determine the stop symbols related to the main game symbols based on the game lottery symbol lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (the second main game content determination random number) lottery symbols on the main game symbols, temporary these in the RAM area of the main control board M Remember.

  Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A, 5A, 7A" and "4B, 5B, 7B") are selected. One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a big hit symbol. In addition, the number of rounds and opening pattern of special game decided with reference to the said main game design, 4A is 8 round short opening big hit, 4B is 16 round short opening big hit, 5A ・ 5B is 8 round long opening big hit, 7A And 7B is a 16 round long open jackpot. The random number value and the type of stop symbol are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. If a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main gaming symbol may be different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}. Here, short opening and long opening can be realized by varying the opening time of the large winning opening per round (first large winning opening C10 and / or second large winning opening C20), for example, In the case of short opening, the game ball opens only for a very short time (for example, 1.8 s to 4.0 s) such that 1 to 3 balls can be hit, while in the case of long opening, it takes a long time (for example, , 30s) can be exemplified opening (but it can also be realized by changing the upper limit number of entry to the big winning opening per round, for example, in the case of short opening, the upper limit of entry While the number is set to 1, in the case of long opening, the upper limit number of ball entry is set to 10, etc.).

  In addition, as will be described later, a special game execution round (1) including an aspect in which the big winning opening is opened only for a minimum time (for example, 52 ms to 700 ms) of the game ball entering 0 to 1 ball. During the round, at least one ball may be inserted). By performing the opening period of the minimum time in the round where the second big winning opening is opened, control may be performed to execute a round not assuming entering the specific area C22, and such control is also performed. In this case, it is preferable to set the opening mode of the shielding member C22c and the inside of the big winning opening so that the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 even if the game ball enters the game during the open period. . In addition, during the special game, on the effect display device SG, it is configured to accumulate and display the balls (the number of winning balls, the number of effective balls) acquired during the special game in each round or in the start / executed round. It is also good. In addition, the number of shots and the number of payouts are substantially increased when the game ball continues to be fired in a round that performs only a short opening (for example, the opening of the minimum time described above). If it can not be expected, the number of rounds that will be long open (round to execute the opening mode capable of entering the upper limit number of balls) already executed during the special game, and the number of withdrawals obtained in the long open round It may be configured to display only on the effect display device SG. By configuring in this manner, the player can visually recognize how many rounds for which a ball can be substantially obtained can be executed. In addition, during the special game, it is necessary to execute notification of the round (including the long opening) for which it is easy to acquire the planned withdrawal balls, and the notification of the round for which the executed balls are easy to be acquired in all the special games. For example, it may be configured to execute only during the special game at the time of the first hit (the big hit won in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state), and the special game pertaining to the first main game side The presence or absence of execution may be different depending on the special game pertaining to the second main game side, and the effect control state controlled by the CPU of the sub control board S side instead of the main control board M side (effect mode, stay Depending on the stage), the presence or absence of execution may differ.

  Next, in step 1410-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M selects the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B corresponding to each gaming state) ) Determine the variation mode of the main gaming symbols based on the main gaming symbol conformity lottery result and the variation mode lottery random number of the first main gaming content determination random number (second main gaming content determination random number), and mainly control these It temporarily stores in the RAM area of the substrate M, and proceeds to step 1415.

  Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main gaming symbol is determined based on the lottery result of the main gaming symbol and the main gaming time short flag state. In other words, if the main lottery game lottery result is a hit, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, and if the main game time short flag is on (time saving game state) relative It is configured that the variation mode in which the variation time is short is easily determined. In addition, this example is an example to the last, and it is not limited at all by the kind of a stop symbol, selection rate, etc. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of description, although the table is not configured to have different tables according to the number of holding balls, it goes without saying that the table may be configured to have different tables according to the number of holding balls. Absent. Furthermore, the symbol variation time of the first main game may be relatively long in the time reduction gaming state (when the main game time short flag is on) {the symbol on the second main game When it is configured that it is advantageous for the player to execute the fluctuation, it is easy to cause the second main gaming side to hold by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency of the first main gaming side (it is advantageous for the player In order to construct a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting opening on the first main game side and the starting opening on the second main game side can not be separated. In addition, in the period corresponding to the period previously determined as the limited frequency described above, the variation frequency of the symbol is determined using the limited frequency table.

  Next, in step 1415, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, fluctuation mode information, etc.) related to the main gaming symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control substrate M Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command (symbol variation display start instruction command) relating to the current gaming state to the sub main control unit SM side (by the control command transmission processing of step 1930 the sub main control unit SM side Sent to). Next, in step 1416, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol to the first and second main gaming symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1417, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first main game symbol display area A21g (second main game symbol display area) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) In B21g), according to the variation mode stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the variation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1418, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuation flag, and proceeds to step 1420.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1419 whether the in-fluctuating flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and in the case of No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500).

  Next, in step 1420, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, the CPU MC of the main control board M in step 1422 is for transmitting a command for transmitting information (design confirmation display instruction command) indicating that design variation is finished to the sub main control unit SM side The buffer MT10 is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1930). Next, in step 1423, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first main game symbol display area A21g (second main game symbol display area) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) Stop the variation display of the main game symbol on the display, and control the display of the stop symbol stored in the RAM area of the main control board M as the fixed stop symbol. Next, in step 1424, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the fluctuation flag.

  Next, in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. If Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the condition device activation flag. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

  Next, in step 1450, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1500). Also in the case of No at step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, at step 1452, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the probability variation counter MP 51 c and determines whether the counter value is greater than zero. If Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variation number counter MP 51 c. Next, in step 1456, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51c, and determines whether the counter value (remaining probability variation number) is zero. If Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag and shifts to step 1462. On the other hand, if No in step 1452 or step 1456, the process goes to step 1462.

  Next, in step 1462, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c, and determines whether the counter value is larger than zero. If Yes in step 1462, in step 1464, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the count value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1466, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c, and determines whether the counter value (remaining time reduction number) is zero. If Yes in step 1466, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time short flag and the auxiliary game time short flag in step 1468 and step 1470, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1500). Also in the case of No in step 1462 and step 1466, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1500). In this embodiment, since the time saving gaming state on the main game side and the time shortening gaming state on the auxiliary game side are synchronized, the auxiliary game side is based on the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c on the main game side. If you are controlling the time-saving gaming state of the, but the time-saving gaming state of the main gaming side and the auxiliary gaming side is not synchronized, by separately providing the auxiliary gaming side time reduction counter, each independently It may be managed.

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether a condition device operation flag (a flag for operating the accessory continuous actuation device for continuously operating the special electric symbol) is on. If Yes in step 1502, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time short flag, auxiliary game time short flag) in step 1504. Next, in step 1506, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the probability variation number counter MP51 c. Next, at step 1508, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1510, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the special game shift permission flag. Next, in step 1512, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1600). Also in the case of No in step 1502, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). Note that the description of FIG. 12 in the present embodiment is an example of a gaming machine not equipped with a small hit, and a small hit as a special game (a condition device inoperability and a special electric character function is activated) is won. In this case, the main game probability change flag and the main game time short flag are not turned off, and the probability change number counter MP51c and the time reduction number counter MP52c are not cleared, and only control to turn on the special game transition permission flag is executed.

  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the special game transition permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag in step 1604 and step 1606. Next, in step 1608, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect of starting a special game to the sub main control unit side. (It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1930), and the process proceeds to step 1614.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1602, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1612 whether the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1612, the process proceeds to step 1614. In the case of No at step 1612, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines that the special game permission has not been issued, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1910).

  Next, in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a round in which the number of rounds executed in the special game is a distribution game execution round (a second large winning opening C20 having a specific area C22 is opened and In this example, it is determined whether or not the second R and the fourth R) are reached. In the present embodiment, two rounds not consecutive to the second R and the fourth R are the rounds related to the opening of the second big winning opening C20, but this means that the game ball can flow down during the special game When the game area D30 is stored in a specific place in the game area D30 (so-called ball clogged), the player is returned to the second large winning opening C20 (or the specific area C22) for the game again. The purpose is to provide an opportunity to enter a ball {Whether or not the gaming state after the special game is a probability variation gaming state whether or not to enter the second large winning opening C20 (or specific area C22) Such a point is important because it is determined by Moreover, in this embodiment, although the two rounds which concern on opening of the 2nd big winning opening C20 are provided, it is not limited to this, The round which concerns more opening of the 2nd big winning opening C20 more rounds It may be

  In the case of Yes in step 1614, in step 1650, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a distribution game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1640.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1614, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1616 whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is just before the start of each round. If Yes in step 1616, that is, immediately before the start of each round, in step 1618, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an open pattern (for example, an open pattern that continues to be open, a pattern to open and close). Next, in step 1620, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1622, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1624, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first large winning opening electric combination C11d to open the first large winning opening C10, and the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer). Is set and set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the process proceeds to step 1626. On the other hand, if No in step 1616, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1626 without performing the processing of steps 1618 to 1624.

  Next, in step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub main control unit SM side. The command transmission buffer MT10 to be sent is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission processing of step 1930). Next, in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and whether or not there is a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of winning balls in the first big winning opening C10 in the round. Determine if In the case of Yes at step 1628, control is passed to step 1632. On the other hand, if No in step 1628, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer) in step 1630, and a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to opening of the special winning opening. It is determined whether or not has passed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1630, the process proceeds to step 1632. In the case of No at step 1630, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1910).

  Next, in step 1632, the CPU MC of the main control board M stops driving of the first large winning opening electric combination C11d of the first large winning opening C10 and closes the first large winning opening C10. Next, in step 1634, the CPU MC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer). Next, in step 1636, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1638, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown).

  Next, in step 1640, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the final round has ended (for example, whether the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) exceeds the maximum round number). . If Yes in step 1640, in step 1642, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, in step 1644, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect of ending the special game to the sub main control unit SM side. Set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission processing of step 1930). Next, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1910). Also in the case of No at step 1640, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1910).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. 13 in the present embodiment. First, at step 1652, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game underway flag is on. If the result of step 1652 is "Yes", that is, if the sorting game is being executed, the process shifts to the processing relating to the determination of the end of the sorting game after step 1666.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at Step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second large winning opening C20 (sorting winning opening C20) for a long time at Step 1654. It is determined whether or not a predetermined jackpot symbol (in this example, 5A, 7A or 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1654, in step 1656, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a long opening pattern of the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 (for example, opening for 15 seconds, and playing the specific area C22 The opening pattern of the second big winning opening C20, which makes it easy for the ball to enter the ball, is set, and the process shifts to step 1660. At this time, as the operation pattern of the shielding member arranged in the vicinity of the specific area C22, the remaining ball flow-down time (the game ball entered into the big winning opening is large taking into consideration the flowing time of the gaming ball in 15 seconds plus the big winning opening A mode for ensuring that the game ball is allowed to enter the specific area C22 from the start of the opening operation of the special winning opening, for example, for 1 second). First position)). On the other hand, if No in step 1654, that is, if the jackpot symbol is 4A or 4B, in step 1658, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a short including the minimum opening of the second big winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. Opening pattern, for example, opening for 0.052 seconds (opening of flow passage to specific area C22 by shielding member) → closing for 5 seconds (during which the flow passage to specific region C22 is blocked by shielding member) → 4 seconds The opening pattern is set for the second large winning opening C20, which is open (no closing time after the last opening is provided), and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area C22, and the process moves to step 1660. Next, at step 1660, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears (zero clears) the value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1662, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game execution flag. Next, in step 1664, the allotment game execution control means MP36 starts the opening of the second big winning opening C20 according to the opening pattern set in the above-mentioned processing. In addition, even if it is a special game according to the symbol corresponding to the short opening pattern, the shielding control by the shielding member is not performed in the period which is once closed, and it is possible to pass to the specific area C22 at the time of opening thereafter. , Even though the appearance of the opening of the big winning opening is a disadvantageous pattern, in fact the game ball enters the specific area C22 because the shielding member was open, and it is in an advantageous state after the end of the special game ( It may have a reverse short open pattern (short open pattern advantageous to the player) that implements control to be controlled to the probability fluctuation gaming state).

  Next, in step 1666, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won in the second large winning opening C20. . In the case of Yes in step 1666, in step 1670, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second large winning opening C20. On the other hand, if No in step 1666, in step 1668, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the open period (set open pattern) of the second large winning opening C20 has ended. In the case of Yes in step 1668, the process shifts to step 1670 to close the second large winning opening C20. Next, at step 1672, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the long open flag. Next, in step 1674, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game execution flag.

  Next, in step 1676, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1676, in step 1678, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag, and proceeds to step 1680. On the other hand, if No in step 1676, the process proceeds to step 1680. Next, in step 1680, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 (increment) to the value of the round number counter (ends the execution round of the sorting game), and shifts to the next processing (the processing of step 1640) Do. Also in the case of No at step 1668, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1640).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the probability change transfer reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the probability change transfer reservation flag. Next, in step 1706, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the number of fluctuations (for example, 150) of the main gaming symbol for which the probability variation gaming state continues to the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1708, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on a main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the number of times the main gaming symbol changes to continue the time reduction gaming state (especially when the time reduction gaming state is made during the probability fluctuation gaming state) in the time reduction counter MP52c. Is the same value as the value set in the probability variation number counter MP51c, for example, 150) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1714. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1712, the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the number of times of main game symbol fluctuation in which the time reduction gaming state continues to the time reduction counter MP52c In the time saving game state, for example, 100) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1714.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of changes in the time shortening gaming state provided in the probability fluctuation gaming state may be greater than the number of fluctuations in the probability fluctuation gaming state. That is, it may be configured to shift to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the termination of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. By configuring in this manner, even if the jackpot is not won in the probability variation gaming state, the point that the time shortening gaming state continues even after that, that is, the state advantageous to the player continues for a certain period And a user-friendly gaming machine.

  Next, in steps 1714 and 1716, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag and the auxiliary game time short flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1910).

  Next, control processing executed on the side of the sub main control unit SM will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 16 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 5D is a process on the side of the sub main control unit SM which is executed after resetting such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, in step 2050, the sub main control unit SM executes an initial process described later. Next, in step 2002, the sub main control unit SM permits execution of the interrupt processing. Thereafter, the process shifts to loop processing that repeatedly executes (e), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub main control unit SM. Here, when (e) is executed, as shown in the process of (e) in the figure, first, at step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a suspension information management process described later. Next, in step 2200, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a first suggestion effect execution control process described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a second suggestion effect execution control process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes special game related display control processing described later. Next, in step 2700, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a firing position notification control process described later. Next, in step 2020, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes display command transmission control processing (sends the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), and ends this repetitive processing routine. Do.

  As described above, the sub main control unit SM employs a mode in which the sub main routine (S2100 to S2700 and S2020) is looped after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 6F is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example , NMI terminal) is the processing flow (f) when it is connected. That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives a command input port from the main control board M side. Check the (input port of data signal line mentioned above). Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M in the RAM of the sub main control unit SM based on the confirmation result, and immediately before this interrupt processing. Return to the process being executed.

  Next, the process of FIG. 6G is a flowchart of the power-off process, for example, when a power-off signal is received from the power supply unit E, the main control board M, or the like. That is, when the power-off signal is received, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stores the game related information stored in the RAM in the save area in step 2014. Next, in step 2016, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts supplying standby power to the save area. Next, in step 2018, the CPUSC of the sub control board S prohibits the execution of the interrupt processing, and shifts to a power failure waiting loop. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and an area to which standby power is automatically supplied even after power interruption is provided to the RAM (or a RAM to which standby power is automatically supplied is provided), and game related information May be configured to be stored.

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of an initial process according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, at step 2052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the RAM clear information from the main control board M side has been received. If YES in step 2052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the information (particularly, game related information) stored in the save area in step 2054, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2002). .

  On the other hand, if No in step 2052, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2056 whether or not various information commands from the main control board M side have been received. In the case of Yes in step 2056, in step 2058, the CPUSC of the sub control board S restores the information (particularly, game related information) stored in the save area, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2002). .

  On the other hand, if No in step 2056, that is, if neither the RAM clear information nor the various information commands are received from the main control board M side, the process proceeds to step 2052, and the command reception from the main control board M side is performed. , Loop processing to execute step 2052 and step 2056.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S obtains a command set related to a new hold occurrence from the main control board M side (information capable of identifying the hold number relating to the first main game and the second main game, newly obtained It is determined whether or not the information related to the random number value, the information to be used for the prior determination, and the like have been received. If Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a rendering hold counter (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game and a maximum of four for the second main game). Add 1 ". Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S, based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side, the hold information (in particular, a random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) Temporary storage in the RAM area, and the process proceeds to step 2116.

  In addition, as a configuration related to the command related to the new holding occurrence, the number of holdings of the first main game side to the upper (4 bits), the number of holdings of the second main game side to the lower (4 bits) The first main game is transmitted to the board S side at one time, and the number-of-holds information stored in the secondary control board S side is compared with the received number of the first main game side and the second main game side received. It may be configured to determine that a new hold has occurred if there is a change in the hold number between the side hold number and the second main game side hold number. In addition, the information regarding the number of reservations received on the secondary control board S side is compared with the number of reservations information stored on the secondary control board S side, and the number of reservations on the first main game side and the second main game side If the number of reservations changes by 2 or more in total with the number of reservations, it may be configured to cancel the pre-reading effect being executed, or the pre-reading lottery for the reservation relating to the command that triggered the change of 2 or more. It may be configured that it is not possible (it is impossible to judge whether the information not stored as a random number in the sub control board S is a hit or whether it is a super reach). In addition, when configured as such, when a random number value or prefetch information is received without receiving the number of holding balls due to a command communication failure or the like, it is stored in the temporary save storage area, and the next holding is performed. It may be configured to be stored when a command regarding generation is received normally. If the amount of change in the number of reservations is 1 or more for each of the number of reservations on the first main game and the number on the second main game, the command regarding the occurrence of the suspension received this time (and last time) is Since it can not be determined which of the first main game player's hold and the second main game player's hold is related to the hold, in such a case, the hold related to the command regarding the generation of the hold that was received this time (and last time) It may be configured not to carry out the pre-reading lottery for. Dummy data may be stored also for random number information on each of the hold related to the command related to the hold generation this time and the last time received. In addition, when the dummy data is stored in any hold within the hold, the prefetch lottery is not executed for the hold caused in the transition, and all the hold in which the dummy data is stored is digested. It may be configured to be able to execute a pre-reading lottery for a hold that has occurred thereafter.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side in step 2108. If Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter. Next, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes the suspension information related to the symbol variation from the RAM area of the sub control substrate S, and shifts the remaining suspension information. Next, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2116. Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S makes full use of the effect display means SS to draw on the effect display device SG (in particular, on the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13) The pending display lamps of the same number as the counter value are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200). In the case of No at step 2108, the process proceeds to step 2116.

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of first suggestion effect execution control processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time shortening / probability fluctuation gaming state.

  In the case of Yes in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a flag indicating that the first suggestion effect execution flag (a flag that turns on when a hold that satisfies a predetermined condition occurs as described later) in step 2204 Under the condition that the flag is on, it is determined whether or not an image is displayed to indicate or notify the presence of a hold that satisfies the predetermined condition.

  In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S newly determines whether the second main game side hold (hereinafter referred to as the second main game hold) has occurred (in other words, the first It is determined whether or not the hold on the main game side to be prioritized is generated among the hold on the main game side and the hold on the second main game side). In the case of Yes in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2208, if symbol variation is being performed at this time, the variation (variation currently being executed) is a short open big hit (second big winning opening) Since it is a big hit that opens the C20 for a very short time, it is difficult to enter the specific area C22, and it is difficult to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the special game related to the big hit. In other words, it is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation that will be a jackpot scheduled to shift to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of the special game related to the jackpot. In addition, the thing of a short opening big hit may be called a non-probability variation big hit.

  If Yes in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is undigested based on the suspension information (for example, the lottery random number, the symbol determination random number) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S in step 2210 Judgment result (and kind of stop symbol) of certain second main game hold (including the new second main game hold) is determined in advance. Next, in step 2212, the CPUSC of the sub control board S does not have a short open jackpot for the hold suspended before the new hold (second main game hold) based on the preliminary determination result. It is determined whether or not.

  If Yes in step 2212, in step 2214, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the new second main game hold is a long opening big hit (because it is a big hit that opens the second big winning opening C20 for a long time, A big hit that makes it easy to enter a specific area C22, and it is definite to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game pertaining to the big hit. It is determined whether or not it is a hold that will be a big hit) scheduled to transition to the state. If Yes in step 2214, in step 2216, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a first suggestion effect trigger hold lottery which is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). Next, in step 2218, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the first suggestion effect trigger hold lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2218, in step 2220, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds information indicating that the first suggestion effect trigger is on hold to the new hold (second main game hold), and the sub control board S In the RAM area of Next, in step 2222, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the first suggestion effect execution flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2300). In addition, the thing of long opening big hit may be called a definite change big hit.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2204, in other words, if there is a first suggestion effect trigger hold that is a hold that satisfies the predetermined condition, then in step 2224 the CPUSC of the sub control board S is currently first It is judged whether it is not the end timing of the change concerning the suggestion effect trigger hold (it is judged whether it is the time of the symbol change end at the time of the holding digest to which the information to the effect of being the first indication effect trigger hold) . In the case of Yes in step 2224, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a first long open indication image (an image notifying that a big hit will be made if it becomes a big hit while the image is displayed) in step 2226 The command is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Here, as shown in the lower image of the figure, the first long open suggestion image is displayed on the effect display device SG, the character (in this example, "If you hit a big hit during this effect long open big hit!" If a combination of decorative symbols that make a big hit is displayed while the image is being displayed, it is configured such that it can be notified that it will be a big change big hit (it will not be a non positive change big hit). In addition, this example is an example to the last, and it is not limited to this, For example, you may comprise so that that may be performed as alerting | reporting by an audio | voice (or alerting | reporting by an image and an audio | voice may be performed simultaneously).

  On the other hand, if the result of step 2202 is No, in step 2228, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the first long open indication image. Next, in steps 2230 and 2232, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the information indicating that the first suggestion effect trigger is suspended from the suspension temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control substrate S, and The first suggestion effect execution flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Also in the case of No at step 2224, the process proceeds to step 2228.

  By configuring in this manner, in the first suggestion effect execution control process, the first long open suggestion image is displayed, and the player can then recognize that the probability variation big hit has occurred. Although it is an essential condition, it is essential to make a prior determination of the result of the determination of the acceptance (and the type of the stop symbol) of the pending (in this example, especially the second main game pending) which is undigested, though As described later, in the second suggestion effect execution control process, it is possible to produce the same action without performing this prior determination). In addition, this example is only an example to the last, and it is not limited to this, For example, also as a generation | occurrence | production condition of a 1st suggestion production trigger hold, a 1st suggestion production trigger also when the new hold becomes a long open big hit It may be configured to execute a holding lottery (in this case, it is desirable that the probability of winning is lower than the lottery performed when the new holding is a long open jackpot). It may be added to the occurrence condition that the fluctuation time at the time of digestion of holding becomes equal to or longer than a predetermined time (or it becomes a so-called reach state by the combination of decorative symbols) It may be added to the generating condition that the fluctuation time in does not become a predetermined time or more (or a combination of decorative symbols does not make it a so-called reach state). However, in the case where the first suggestion effect trigger hold exists and the first long open suggestion image is displayed, it is informed that it may become a probability variation big hit (cannot be a non probability variation big hit) Therefore, it is a requisite that the condition for the first suggestion effect trigger hold be that the new hold is not a short opening jackpot.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of second suggestion effect execution control processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time shortening / probability fluctuation gaming state.

  If Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the symbol (currently executed) if the symbol variation is being made at the current point, the short opening big hit (second big winning prize It is determined whether or not it is a big hit that opens the mouth C20 for a very short time, and is a big hit) which is scheduled to shift to the non-probable fluctuation gaming state after the end of the special game pertaining to the big hit.

  In the case of Yes in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2306 whether the first suggestion effect execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2308 whether the second suggestion effect execution flag is off. Here, the purpose of determining whether or not the first suggestion effect execution flag is off performs exclusive control of the above-described first suggestion effect execution control process and the second suggestion effect execution control process (simultaneously parallel) To avoid being executed), it is added that the determination process is not required when the above-described first suggestion effect execution control process is not implemented.

  In the case of Yes in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2310 whether or not the flag during flag change is turned on from the off state (it is the symbol change start timing). In the case of Yes in step 2310, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is elected in step 2312 with a predetermined probability (desirably lower probability than the aforementioned first suggestion effect trigger hold lottery, for example, 1/10) , Perform the second suggestion effect lottery. Next, in step 2314, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the second suggestion effect lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2314, in step 2316, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the second suggestion effect execution flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2400).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2308, that is, in the case where the second suggestion effect execution flag is on, in step 2318, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the second long open suggestion image If it is, it is an image to notify that it is a probability variation big hit, and a command to display the same or almost the same image as the above-mentioned first long open suggestion image is set, and the process shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2400) Do.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2302, step 2304 or step 2306, in step 2320, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the second long open indication image. Next, in step 2322, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the second suggestion effect execution flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2400). Also in the case of No in step 2310 or step 2314, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  With this configuration, in the second suggestion effect execution control process, the second long opening suggestion image is displayed, so that the player can then recognize that the probability variation jackpot has occurred. However, as shown in this example, the second long open suggestion image is displayed as a result by controlling that the second long open suggestion image is not displayed by the end of the symbol variation related to the non-probable variation big hit at the latest as shown in this example. During the period of time, it is configured that a probability variation big hit can occur. That is, in the second suggestion effect execution control process, unlike the first suggestion effect execution control process, the type of the result of determination of the on-hold (in this example, especially the second main game hold) which is undigested (and the type of stop symbol) Because there is no need to perform prior judgment of), execution becomes easy regardless of the occurrence status of pending, the type of gaming state, and the presence or absence of transition of gaming state, and in the second suggestion effect execution control process, (1) It becomes possible to continue to display "an image notifying that a big hit if it becomes a big hit during display of the image concerned" over a long period of time than the suggested production execution control process (for example, the first It is possible to straddle the reserve digest of different main game sides such as the reserve digest of the main game side → the reserve digest of the second main game side, or the reserve digest of the second main game side → the reserve digest of the first main game side. Continue to display even if the situation is It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to continue to display continuously even if it is a situation that straddles different gaming states, such as probability fluctuation gaming state → non-probability fluctuation gaming state, etc. The period for which display is continued does not depend on the upper limit number of reservations or the upper limit number of stay of the game state).

  That is, if the first suggestion effect execution control process and the second suggestion effect execution control process are combined, <feature 1> there is no hold on the first main game side to be undigested and / or the second to be undigested Even if there is no hold on the main game side, it is possible to continue to display the first long open indication image or the second long open indication image, <Feature 2> the hold on the first main game side to be undigested Even when the symbol on the second main game side changes in the existing state, the first long open suggestion image or the second long open suggestion image can be continuously displayed, <feature 3> second undigested Even when the symbol on the first main game side changes in the state where there is a game side suspension, the first long open suggestion image or the second long open suggestion image can be continuously displayed, <Feature 4> the second Even when symbol change on the first main game side after symbol change on the main game side, the first long opening is shown The image or the second long opening suggestion image can be continuously displayed, <Feature 5> The first long opening suggestion image or the second even at the time of symbol variation on the second main gaming side after symbol variation on the first main gaming side A long opening suggestion image can be continuously displayed, <Feature 6> In a situation where only symbol variation on the first main game side is being performed, a second long opening suggestion caused by execution of a second suggestion effect execution control process In the situation where only the display / non-display of the image is performed, and only the symbol variation on the second main game side is being performed, the second long open indication is caused by the execution of the second suggestion effect execution control process Not only the display / non-display of the image, but also the display / non-display of the first long open suggestion image resulting from the execution of the first suggestion effect execution control process is performed.

  In the above example, since the purpose is to clarify the difference between the control method of the first suggestion production execution control process and the second suggestion production execution control process, for example, the second long open suggestion image Although this is an example in which the occurrence of the non-deterministic big hit becomes definite when it becomes non-displayed, it is of course that this example is not sufficient to enhance the interest of the game. The additional configuration for enhancing the interest of the game will be described later as a modified example. In addition, as a condition for executing the display of the long open suggestion image in this example, for example, the display is executed under the condition that the hold to be the short open jackpot has occurred (or the lottery of whether or not to execute the display) , And may be configured to erase the display prior to the start of the fluctuation of the hold that is the short open jackpot.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, at step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2404. Next, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub control board S draws symbol information (stop symbol / variation mode relating to the main game symbol) temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S and drawing variation determination lottery With reference to the table SM21 ta, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {eg, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol, if it is a missing symbol such as "7 · 7 · 7" Is a loose eye such as "1 3 5" and the variation aspect {eg, when the variation aspect relating to the main game pattern is a short-term variation, non-reach, if it is a long-term variation, normal reach And super reach etc. are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S.

  Next, in step 2408, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2500). Also in the case of No at step 2402, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the symbol content determination flag is on. If Yes in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag in step 2504. Next, in step 2506, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on a symbol variation flag. Next, in step 2508, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the drawing variation time management timer SM 21 t and shifts to step 2510. Also in the case of No at step 2502, the process proceeds to step 2510.

  Next, in step 2510, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2510, in step 2511, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the variation start timing of the decorative symbol based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S. It is determined whether it has reached. If Yes in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the variation display command of the decorative symbol in step 2514 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2020). , And proceeds to step 2530.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2512, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the decorative pattern based on the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM 21t and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S in step 2516. It is determined whether the display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. If YES in step 2516, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol in step 2518 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2020, the sub sub control unit SS side) And the process proceeds to step 2530.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2516, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines at step 2520 based on the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. It is determined whether or not the display timing of the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2520, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets an image display command related to the notice image or the reach image in step 2522 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2020, to the sub sub control unit SS side) To be sent), and proceeds to step 2530. Also in the case of No at step 2520, the process proceeds to step 2530.

  Next, in step 2530, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed. If YES in step 2530, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative symbol in step 2532 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing of step 2020 Be done). Next, in step 2534, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and resets (zero clears). Next, in step 2536, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol variation flag and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2600). Also in the case of No at step 2510 or step 2530, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side in step 2604. In the case of Yes in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the special game flag in step 2606 and step 2608, and performs a big hit start display on the effect display device SG (as appropriate based on the type of big hit Set the command to display), and shift to step 2612. Also in the case of No at step 2602, the process proceeds to step 2612.

  Next, in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of wins on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main control board M side (gamability And based on the type of jackpot, etc., it may be performed as appropriate). Next, in step 2614, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2614, in step 2616, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for performing a big hit end display (performing display appropriately based on the type of big hit) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2618, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S turns off the special game flag and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2700). Also in the case of No in step 2604 or step 2614, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2700).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the firing position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 in FIG. First, at step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the second notification image on the second layer in display control (the front layer of the third layer for displaying a decorative pattern). Do.

  Here, as shown in the image diagram on the right side of the figure, the first notification image, the second notification image, and the third notification image are displayed on the right of the player (so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30, It is to launch the gaming ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the gaming ball, and further to have a first firing intensity which enables the gaming sphere to be released to the gaming area D30, and a firing intensity greater than the first firing intensity and the gaming area D30. And a second firing intensity that enables the game ball to be released, which means that the second firing intensity is indicated. Also, regarding the concept of the first layer, the second layer, the third layer, and the fourth layer in display control, as shown in the lower part of the image diagram, the first layer is the foreground and the fourth layer is the back, When the images to be displayed overlap, the image displayed on the layer on the front is displayed with priority. The decorative symbol is displayed on the third layer.

  Next, in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether a new first main game start opening ball detection command has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2708 whether or not the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2708, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the first layer in display control (the third layer for displaying a decorative pattern and the front layer for the second layer for displaying a second notification image). , A command to display the first notification image is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2020). Also in the case of No in step 2706, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2020).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2708, that is, at the timing when the ball entering the first main game starting slot A10 is detected during the time shortening game, if symbol stopping is in progress, at step 2712 The CPUSC sets a command for displaying the first notification image on the fourth layer (the third layer for displaying the decoration pattern and the second layer for displaying the second notification image) in display control, and performs the next process. It shifts to (the process of step 2020). Also in the case of No in step 2706, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2020).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2702, that is, if the current gaming state is not the time shortening gaming state, in step 2714, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the special gaming flag is on. If Yes in step 2714, in step 2716, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is in the third layer (the third layer for displaying the decorative symbol) in the display control and in a position not overlapping the decorative symbol. Set a command to display a notification image. Next, in step 2718, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether a new first main game start opening ball detection command has been received. If Yes in step 2718, in step 2720, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the first notification image on the first layer (the front layer of the third layer displaying the decoration pattern and the third notification image) in display control. The command to be displayed is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2020). Also in the case of No in step 2714 or step 2718, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2020). Here, when the special game flag is on, that is, when the special game is being executed, the second notification image is not displayed, so the special game is being executed. It should be added that it is configured to be able to avoid confusion display with the third notification image displayed on the. Note that the notification image in the special game (the image which is always displayed, and in this example, the third notification image) may display the same image as the second notification image. When configured as such, the display position of the notification image may be changed as appropriate (for example, the position displayed in the special game and the time reduction gaming state after the special game is ended) Make the position different or expand / contract etc.).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first notification image is displayed when the first main game start opening ball entry detection command is received from the main control board M side during the time saving game state or the special game is being executed. Although configured, audio notification of a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) may be performed along with the display of the first notification image (for example, audio notification of “Please hit right”) (for example, “right strike” Please do it → → mute for a predetermined period → “Please hit right” → mute for a predetermined period → voice notification “Please hit right” can be exemplified). By configuring in this manner, the player who has made a right-hand strike (to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball and launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30) It will be able to more reliably communicate that it is a high profit. In addition, when the voice notification is performed together with the display of the first notification image, the display of the first notification image may be ended at the timing when the number of executions of the voice notification reaches the predetermined number. Furthermore, if the first main game start opening ball entry detection command is newly received from the main side one or more times at a timing before the number of times of execution of the voice notification reaches the predetermined number, from the timing The voice notification and the display of the first notification image may be performed again a predetermined number of times (from the end timing of the voice notification being performed).

  Although not particularly illustrated in the present embodiment, the first notification image is a fixed still image, and the second notification image is a moving image that moves within a predetermined range. By this configuration, even if the second notification image is displayed smaller than the first notification image, the second notification image moves within a certain range (is a moving image) and the player Can be easily recognized.

  By configuring as described above, in the launch position notification control process, the game ball is hit in the progress of the game by adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30. In the situation where it is desirable to launch) (in this example, the second main game start port B10 and the big winning opening are provided on the right side of the game area D30, so the time reduction game and the special game) The image that instructs the player to hit the right is displayed in multiple patterns corresponding to the game situation (in this example, the decorative symbol is displayed on the third layer, and during the time saving gaming state, the second layer is displayed on the second layer) (2) The notification image is displayed, and in particular, when the ball entering the first main game start opening A10 is detected, the first notification image is displayed on the first layer while the symbol is changing, and the fourth layer is displayed while the symbol is stopped. Display the first notification image on In addition, during the special game, the third notification image is displayed on the third layer and in a position that does not overlap with the decorative symbol, and in particular, when entering the first main game start opening A10 is detected. Is configured to be able to display the first notification image on the first layer in a pattern), and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

(Modification example pertaining to the first indication effect execution control process and the second indication effect execution control process)
As described above, the control methods of the first suggestion effect execution control process and the second suggestion effect execution control process are not limited to those shown in the above embodiments, and in particular, the fun of the game There is room for further improvement to raise it. <Improvement Example 1> For example, although the first long opening suggestion effect is configured to be able to start when the second main game hold occurs, the effect is started at the time when the change of the main game symbol starts, or during the execution of a special game, etc. It may be configured to be able to start. Further, similarly, the second long opening suggestion effect can be similarly configured to be able to start the effect at the same timing (at the hold occurrence, at the fluctuation start, during special game execution, etc.) as the start trigger of the first long opening effect. , It becomes possible to enhance the effect of the second long open indication effect (so-called, Gase effect). <Improved Example 2> Furthermore, the end trigger of the long open indication effect (the first long open indication effect and the second long open indication effect) is not limited to the configuration of the above embodiment (in particular, it relates to the non-probable variation jackpot) If the second long opening indication image is not displayed only at the time of symbol change, the occurrence of the non-deterministic variation big hit becomes definite when the second long opening indication image is not displayed. Therefore, the second long opening suggestion image may not be displayed even when there is a symbol change related to a big change chance or a symbol change related to a loss), for example, the end lottery of the effect is executed at the start of the change When the winning lottery is successful, the long open suggestion effect may be configured to be ended (in this case, the first big hit in the hold is a long open big hit hold) Low probability, the first big hit in the hold Hold is short open hit If there is a high probability if it is a hold, and a medium probability if there is no hold to make a big hit in the hold, by winning the end lottery, the effect will be high expectation as the effect continues Is possible). <Improvement Example 3> Further, at the start of the effect, the upper limit number of times the effect continues is determined, and the effect is configured to end when the number of changes thereafter reaches the upper limit number of times. May be In addition, when performing a gusset effect, it is preferable to be configured to end the effect at least before the short open jackpot.

  Further, after the end of the special game, the first long opening indication effect or the second long opening indication effect may be always executed. When configured as such, a whistle of effect {for example, the special game The first long opening suggestion effect or the second long when the main gaming symbol that stops first after the end of the game is the 4B symbol (the symbol that becomes non-time shortening gaming state and non-probability fluctuation gaming state after special game execution) At the beginning of the change of the main game symbol, the first long opening suggestion effect or the second long opening suggestion effect can be configured as non-execution so that the situation where the opening suggestion effect is being performed does not occur. Is desirable.

  In the first suggested effect execution control process and the second suggested effect execution control process, the first long open indication image and the second long open indication image are It is controlled to become an image to notify that it will become a definite big hit if it becomes a big hit while displaying an image, but the content to be notified to the player is not limited to this, for example, non-time shortening If the gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, "an image notifying that the big hit expectation will increase if the image is displayed, or the current gaming state probability variation game if the image is displayed The image may be controlled to be an image notifying that the possibility of being in the state increases, and, of course, in the case of the non-time shortening gaming state and the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, the first long opening suggestion image and the first 2 long open The suggestion image is controlled to be "an image notifying that a big hit if the big image is displayed while displaying the image" or "it is notified that the big hit expectation will increase if the image is displayed. Or, the image may be controlled to be "an image notifying that the possibility that the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state increases if the image is displayed".

  Further, in the above embodiment, the game ball enters the specific area C22 provided in the second big winning opening C20 during the special game, and then it may shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the special game is over. In a game machine (so-called, ball check type game machine) that becomes definitive, it is possible to execute an effect (long open indication effect) that suggests an opening mode of the special winning opening (especially, the second large winning opening C20) However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a general gaming machine (for example, a type in which the transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state is determined depending on the type of the jackpot symbol or the probability fluctuation gaming state continues until the next big hit In the type of game machine), it is possible to execute an effect (an effect corresponding to the first long opening suggestion effect and the second long opening suggestion effect) notifying that it will be a probability fluctuation big hit if it becomes a big hit during the effect It may be configured. In addition, a presentation that indicates the number of times the opening of the special winning opening (so-called maximum number of rounds) in the special game to be executed when the big win during the production (ie, 15 big win if it becomes a big hit during the production Effect to notify that it will be) may be performed, in that case, if it is a big hit during the effect, a effect notifying that it will be a definite variation big hit, and if it can be a big hit during the effect For example, the effect of notifying 15 rounds of becoming a big hit may be configured to occur simultaneously in parallel {ie, when both effects are occurring simultaneously in parallel, the jackpot during the relevant effect The purpose of being notified that it will be a definite variation big hit and 15 round big hit if it becomes, the image for the effect may be a separate one, or it is a notification that a definite variation big hit will be produced = 1st image (Eg red Background image of 15), effect of notifying 15 rounds of big hit = second image (for example, yellow background image), effect of notifying big variation of 15 rounds of probability variation = 3rd image (eg of gold colors) In the case where the notification conditions overlap as the background image), a further separate image may be displayed}. In addition, when the effect of notifying the number of rounds in the special game is to be executed, the number of execution rounds (number of rounds including both rounds where the long winning opening is long open and rounds where the short opening is short open) It is also possible that only the round where the big winning opening becomes long open may be notified of the actual number of rounds. In addition, as described above, the effect of notifying that the jackpot during the effect will be a definite change jackpot (or the fact that a big hit is easy to enter the specific area C22 will be performed), and the effect during the effect If it is configured to occur simultaneously in parallel with the effect to notify that it will be the largest round (for example, 15 rounds) if it becomes a big hit, it will be a definite variation big hit if it becomes a big hit during the effect (or During execution of the effect to notify that a big hit is easy to enter the specific area C22), the number of rounds will not be determined by becoming a big hit during the performance of the effect, but it will be a big change big hit On the other hand, if there is a big hit during the effect, during the execution of the effect notifying that the maximum round (for example, 15 rounds) will be the big hit, it will be a positive It is a big hit Whether is not determined so that the can be created that determined to be a jackpot maximum round (15 rounds), a gaming machine having two gaming properties. In this case, if there are multiple types of big hits (for example, 10 round big hits and 15 round big hits) in which the maximum number of rounds is different, the largest number of big hits (for example, 15) In the case of round big hit), it may be configured to have both the possibility of a definite variation big hit and a non definite variation big hit, and in the case of the largest number of big hits (for example, 15 round big hits) of the maximum number of rounds It is preferable to configure so that the possibility of becoming is higher than the possibility of becoming non-deterministic variation big hit.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the type in which the possibility of shifting to the probability variation gaming state is determined according to the type of the big hit symbol, a further modified example can be mentioned. More specifically, the type of jackpot of the first main game side = "A certainty big hit and 15 rounds (a big winning opening becomes long open in all rounds) big hit", "a certainty big hit and a real 5 round big hit (the first half The big winning opening will be long opening for 5 rounds, while the 10 rounds for the second half will be 15 round big hits where the big winning opening will be short opening), “probable variation big hit and 5 rounds (big winning opening for all rounds Big hit in the long open), "non-probable big hit and real 5 round big hit (in the first half of the 5 rounds the big winning opening will be long open while in the second half of the 10 rounds the big winning opening will be short opening 15 rounds Big hit) "inconsistent big hit and 5 rounds (the big winning opening will be long open in all rounds) big hit", set as the type of big hit on the 2nd main game side = "probably big hit and 15 rounds Big winning opening will be long open in all rounds) Big hit "," probable big hit and real 10 round big hit (10 rounds of the first half will be long opening of the big winning opening, while the second half 5 big winnings "15 round big hit when the mouth is open", "probably big hit and 5 rounds (the big winning opening becomes long open in all rounds) big hit", "non-probable big hit and 15 rounds (large in all rounds Winning opening becomes long opening) Big hit "non-probable variation big hit and substantial 10 round big hit (10 rounds of the first half will be long opening of the big winning opening, while 5 rounds of the second half will be short opening of the big winning opening It is assumed that it is set as “15 rounds big hit)”, “non-probable big hit” and 5 rounds (a big winning opening becomes long open in all rounds) as a big hit ”. In this case, for example, at the time of big hit occurrence on the first main game side, when the fact that the maximum number of rounds = 15 rounds is correctly informed, the sixth round when the big winning opening becomes long open is executed And while the transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state becomes definite in appearance, when the sixth round when the big winning opening becomes short open is executed or when the sixth round is not executed and the big hit is finished, The transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state is not definite in appearance. Therefore, by utilizing this setting, the player can be clearly notified to the player whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state when the sixth round in which the big winning opening becomes long open is executed, or the big winning opening If the sixth round, in which the game player is long open, is not executed, the player is not clearly notified (or informed as a so-called promotion effect) whether or not the transition to the probability variation gaming state is clearly This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. However, as shown in the present example, when a big hit on the first main game side occurs with "a production that announces that if the big hit is a big hit during the production, it will be a definite change big hit", before the big hit start Since the player is already clearly notified to the player whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state, the execution of notification according to whether to shift to the probability variation gaming state during such a big hit is appropriately switched It would be desirable to configure it to be able to In addition, regarding "effect to notify that it will be 15 round big hit if it becomes a big hit during the relevant effect", "effective 5 round big hit (5 rounds of the first half big winning opening will be long open while the second half 10 Rounds are 15 rounds of big winning opening will be short open) and "10 rounds of big hit in the first half (10 rounds of the first half of the large winning opening will be long open, while the second half of 5 rounds of the big winning opening is short It is desirable not to execute the game when the "15 rounds of jackpots open" occurs (because it may be recognized as false notification for the player).

(Modification 1 from the present embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, if it is the first long open indication image, it will be mainly a short open jackpot if it is the second long open indication image, such as when digesting the first suggestion effect trigger hold, etc. It has been decided to end the long-opening suggestion effect by deleting these images at the timing of becoming the etc. (that is, the timing according to the game progress status), but it is not limited to this. In particular, whether or not the long opening suggestion effect should be ended if a power failure or restoration of the game occurs while the first long opening suggestion image or the second long opening suggestion image is displayed. The option arises. Therefore, an example where attention is paid to such a case is set as a first modification example from the present embodiment, and only the changed points will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 25 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub control substrate S (in particular, the side of the sub main control unit SM) in the first modification of the present embodiment. First, the change from the present embodiment is the step 2010 (variation 1), the step 2012 (variation 1), and the step 2013 (variation 1). It is to store the presence or absence of the execution of the long open indication effect at the time (in the process described later, derive the time which has been disconnected from the disconnection occurrence time and the disconnection return time). That is, at the time of receiving the power-off signal, in step 2010 (variable 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the real time clock RTC and acquires (latches) an RTC value. Next, in step 2012 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S stores the acquired RTC value in the save area as a power-off RTC value (power-off time). Next, in step 2013 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S stores game-related information (information relating to the progress of the game, such as a first suggestion effect flag and a second suggestion effect flag) in the save area , Shift to step 2016.

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of initial processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 of FIG. 25 in the first modification from the present embodiment. First of all, the change from the present embodiment is about step 2060 (variation 1) to step 2068 (variation 1), and the purpose is to be able to derive the time during which the power is turned off, and to cut off the power It is to be configured to restore the presence or absence of the long open indication effect at the time of occurrence. That is, in the case of Yes in step 2056, in other words, when various information commands from the main control board M side are received, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the real time clock RTC in step 2060 (variable 1). , Get the RTC value (latch). Next, in step 2062 (variation 1), the sub main control unit SM compares the acquired RTC value (current time of power failure recovery) with the RTC value at power failure stored in the save area, The disconnection time value (RTC value at power failure recovery−RTC value at power failure) is derived. Next, at step 2064 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S determines that the derived power-off time value is a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) and the maintenance time of the gaming machine during the business hours of the game arcade It is determined whether or not it is a power-off time, or it is a value intended to determine whether it is a power-off time from the end of business hours of the game arcade to the time of the next business start. If Yes in step 2064 (variation 1), that is, if power interruption (and receiving various information commands from the main control board M side instead of the RAM clear information) over the predetermined time or more, step 2066 ( At (1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the long-time power-off flag, and proceeds to step 2068 (v1). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2064 (variation 1), that is, in the case of a power failure for less than 10 minutes, the long-term power failure flag is not turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2068 (variation 1). Next, in step 2068 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S restores the information stored in the save area (information relating to the progress of the game, such as the first suggestion effect flag and the second suggestion effect flag) Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2002).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of first suggestion effect execution control processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 25 in the first modification from the present embodiment. First of all, the change from the present embodiment is about step 2201 (variation 1) and step 2227 (variation 1), and the purpose thereof is that the time during which the above-mentioned power interruption is performed is long (for example, 10 minutes or more) If this is the case, it is to end the long open indication effect performed at the time of the power failure. That is, at the start of execution of the subroutine, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2201 (variation 1) whether or not the long-term power interruption flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2201 (variation 1), the process moves to step 2202 and the same processing as this embodiment is executed. On the other hand, if No in step 2201 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the long-time power-off flag in step 2227 (variation 1), shifts to step 2228, and is similar to this embodiment. Processing (processing to end the first suggestion effect) is executed.

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of second suggestion effect execution control processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 25 in the first modification from the present embodiment. First, the point of change from the present embodiment is the step 2301 (variation 1) and the step 2319 (variation 1), and the purpose thereof is that the time during which the above-mentioned power interruption has occurred is long (for example, 10 minutes or more) If this is the case, it is to end the long open indication effect performed at the time of the power failure. That is, at the start of execution of the subroutine, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2301 (variation 1) whether or not the long-time power interruption flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2301 (variation 1), the process moves to step 2302 and the same processing as this embodiment is executed. On the other hand, if No in step 2301 (variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the long-term power-off flag in step 2319 (variation 1), shifts to step 2320 and is similar to this embodiment. The processing (processing to end the second suggestion effect) is executed.

  By changing as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment, the time elapsed from the occurrence of power interruption until the power is turned on again is a predetermined time (10 minutes in this example) or more In some cases (in particular, when clearing of the RAM is not performed), the first indication effect and the second indication effect (instruction indicating the possibility of becoming a long open jackpot) which were being executed at the time of the power interruption are It is configured to be able to finish. By configuring in this way, for example, when a power failure due to the end of the game arcade's operation and a power supply re-insertion due to the business start are performed, it is prevented that the long opening suggestion effect is executed from the game start time. Can. In particular, in the second long opening suggestion image, "an image notifying that a big hit if it becomes a big hit while displaying the image concerned" is a game state even if there is no pending to be undigested or Even in the normal gaming state, which is a disadvantage to the player, it is possible to continue to display continuously, and even when power failure due to the business closing of the game arcade and power supply reopening by the business start are performed. It is possible to keep displaying continuously. However, if "an image notifying that a big hit would be made if a big hit occurs while displaying the image concerned" is displayed at the start of business, a player who has newly arrived after the start of business (in other words, (For example, a player who is likely to be different from the player who played the game at the time of the power interruption), despite the fact that the situation is not particularly advantageous for the player, the whistle is also a favorable situation for the player As a result, there is a possibility that an unfair customer drawing effect at the start of business may be caused, and therefore, under the situation where it is presumed that it is the time of business start, the second long open suggestion image was displayed at the time of power failure However, it is desirable to delete them properly. On the other hand, if the time elapsed from the occurrence of power interruption to the power re-input is less than a predetermined time (10 minutes in this example), in other words, the power interruption time at the maintenance of the gaming machine during business hours of the game arcade If it is estimated that the same player is still playing a game, when the second long opening suggestion image is displayed at the time of the interruption, If not configured to be re-displayed even at the time of the break, there is a risk that the player may be mistaken for the possibility that the power-off will trigger the probability change and the player may be mistaken. When the time elapsed until the power is turned on again is less than a predetermined time (10 minutes in this example), the second long open indication image is restored and redisplayed at the time of the power failure restoration. That's why.

  In addition, you may change the structure of the display mode of a 1st suggestion effect and a 2nd suggestion effect suitably, for example, the condition (for example, non-time shortening game and non-for example, a 1st suggestion effect and a 2nd suggestion effect are not performed) In the probability variation gaming state), a demonstration screen display (for example, a game) is displayed when a game is not executed for a predetermined time (for example, one minute) (when entering a ball into a ball entry port and symbol variation are not executed). Transition to the display of a moving image for introducing the character appearing on the aircraft to the player), while in the situation where the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are executed, the time during which the game is not executed continues Even if it does, it may be configured not to shift to the demonstration screen display.

(Modification 2 from the present embodiment)
In the above embodiment, the notification image is displayed using four layers in display control in the emission position notification control process, but this is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. It is also possible to reduce the processing load by reducing it. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is set as a second modification of the present embodiment, and only the changes will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the firing position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 of FIG. 16 in the second modification of the present embodiment. The change from this embodiment is about step 2730 (variation 2) to step 2746 (variation 2), and the purpose is to reduce the number of display layers to be used and to reduce the processing load. That is, in the case of Yes in step 2702 (when in the time-saving gaming state), the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the second notification image in the second layer in the display control in step 2730 (v. 2). Set the command.

  Here, as shown in the lower part of the image diagram on the right side of the figure, in the second modification from the present embodiment, the display layers are only three layers.

  Next, at step 2732 (mod. 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2732 (mod 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the display layer of the decorative symbol as the third layer (display layer on the back) in step 2734 (mod 2) (first notification image The layer which can be displayed becomes the first layer), and the process shifts to step 2738 (mod. 2). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2732 (mod 2) (when the symbol is stopped), the CPUSC of the sub control board S at step 2736 (mod 2) displays the display layer of the decorative symbol as the first layer The layer is determined (the layer capable of displaying the first notification image is the third layer), and the process shifts to step 2738 (modification 2).

  Next, in step 2738 (mod. 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new first main game start opening entrance detection command has been received. If Yes in step 2738 (mod 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S can display the first notification image in step 2740 (mod 2) (a display layer of a decorative pattern and a display layer of the second notification image) And a command to display the first notification image is set in the first layer or the third layer), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2020). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2738 (variation 2), the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2020).

  If No in step 2714, in other words, it is not in the time saving gaming state and is not in the special gaming state (no right hitting situation), the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2742 (v 2) It is determined whether or not a second main game start opening ball detection command has been received anew. If YES in step 2742 (mod 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the left notification image in the first layer in display control in step 2746 (mod 2), and the next process ( (Processing of step 2020). On the other hand, if the result of step 2742 (mod 2) is No, in step 2744 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not an auxiliary game start opening ball detection command is newly received. If Yes in step 2744 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S proceeds to step 2746 (second). In the case of No in 2744 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S shifts to the next process (the process of step 2020).

  Here, with the left notification image, as shown in the image diagram of the figure, the player strikes the left (the game ball is adjusted to the game sphere so that the game ball flows down the left side of the game area D30) ) Is an image that instructs the user to

  By changing as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment, the game is progressed, the left strike (the game ball is discharged so that the game ball flows down the left side of the game area D30) The situation where it is desirable to adjust the strength and launch the game ball (in this example, since the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 easily enters the first main game start port A10, the non-time-saving game In the middle and in the non-special game), the ball entrance to the ball entrance provided in the right side of the game area D30 (in this example, particularly in the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port B10) is detected In this case, it is configured to be able to display an image instructing the player to hit left, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the additional configurations shown in the above embodiments are of course added to these concepts, as well as the combination and separation (superordinate conceptization) of these listed concepts. May be

Second Embodiment
In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 provided in the special winning opening, it shifts to the probability fluctuation gaming state, and shifts to the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state a predetermined number of times In the gaming machine configured to perform the game, the player has been described in detail the effect of asking the player to win a long open jackpot, and the effect of instructing to break into the game area D30 according to the gaming state, The game characteristics of the gaming machine capable of executing the effects are not limited to this. Regarding the gaming machine having other game characteristics that can execute the effect, only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail as the second embodiment.

  First, FIG. 30 is a view showing the basic structure of the front side of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that a general winning opening P10 is provided on the right side of the game area D30 as viewed from the player and on the lower right side of the first large winning opening C10. Thus, among the gaming balls that flowed down the right side of the game area D30 and flowed near the second large winning opening C20 and the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20 and the first one A game ball that has not entered the special winning opening C10 can enter the general winning opening P10. In addition, on the left side of the gaming area D30 from the player in the gaming area D30, at the upstream position of the path of the game ball which can flow down to the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10, the auxiliary game start port H10- 2 is further provided. As described above, even when the player executes either "right strike" or "left strike" strike, the player enters (passes) any of the auxiliary game start ports H10-1 (H10-2). As a result, the game ball can enter the second main game start opening B10 by operating the second main game start opening electric combination B11d. In the lower left portion of the center decoration D38, a launch instruction display unit HS is provided. Here, the launch instruction display unit HS is composed of two lamps, and when the right lamp (right-handed display unit HSR) is on, it is in a state of recommending “right-handed” to the player, and the left When the lamp (the left strike display portion HSL) is on, it indicates that the player is in the state of recommending “left strike”. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, one speaker D24 is provided on the left and right of the game lamp D26 provided on the upper part of the game board D35, and a speaker left D24L on the left and a speaker right D24R on the right It has become. In addition, about the position which installs these, and its aspect, it is not limited to this example.

  Next, FIG. 31 is a main flow chart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1050 (second) and step 1800 (second), that is, in step 1050 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M displays a launch instruction described later. The unit control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 1100. Further, after the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the special game control process at step 1600, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the small hit game control process described later at step 1800 (second), The process moves to step 1910. The number of winning balls to be paid out in the process of step 1910 is 1st main game start opening A10: 4 balls, 2nd main game start opening B10: 3 balls, first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) : 15 balls, general winning opening P10: 3 balls. Also, in step 1014, with regard to various information commands to be transmitted to the sub control board S, after the command regarding the time reduction counter value is transmitted, the command for restoring the display of the first to fourth notification images An instruction command will be transmitted.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of launch instruction display unit control processing according to the subroutine of step 1050 (second) of FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, at step 1052, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time short flag is on. If Yes in step 1052, in step 1056, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the left hitting display part HSL of the emission instruction displaying part HS and turns on the right hitting display part HSR. On the other hand, if No in step 1052, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1054 whether the special game execution flag is off. If YES in step 1054, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the right-handed display unit HSR of the emission instruction display unit HS and turns on the left-handed display unit HSL in step 1058, and performs the next process (step 1100). Move to In the case of No at step 1054, the process proceeds to step 1056, that is, the left-handed display unit HSL is turned off and the right-handed display unit HSR is lit, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1100). . As described above, in the firing instruction display unit HS, the main game time short flag is on (ie, the current game state is the time shortening game state) or the special game execution flag is on (special game is on) In the case of being executed), the right-handed display section HSR is turned on, and a display for recommending “right-handed” to the player is given. On the other hand, the gaming state is the non-time shortening gaming state and the special game is When the player is not in execution, the left hit display unit HSL is turned on, and the player is instructed to recommend "left hit". In addition, it is not limited to this, as the provision of the one discharge instruction display portion HS, depending on whether it is lighted or not, the color of the light emission in the case of lighting, the lighting of the discharge instruction display portion HS such as blinking Depending on the embodiment, the player may be given a recommendation instruction of “right strike” and “left strike” to the player. Furthermore, immediately before the state in which “right-handed” and “left-handed” are recommended (for example, the time-saving gaming state where “right-handed” is recommended) ends, the lighting mode or color to be lighted is changed Then, the player can be configured to be notified in advance that the state in which "right-handed" or "left-handed" is recommended is finished. Furthermore, when the control regarding the gaming state of the gaming machine is different, whether or not the situation to be shook right is the probability fluctuation state, not the time reduction gaming state of the main gaming side, or special game execution If it is an aspect that should be controlled by linking to another flag, such as during operation of the electric combination (while opening the second main game start opening electric combination B11d) as well as inside, it is determined that the target for right-handling is appropriate It is conceivable to change the type and number of flags to be

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the motorized prize drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is the lottery table for determining the auxiliary game stop symbol in the lower right of the figure, and during the non-time shortening gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, at the time of winning of the auxiliary gaming symbol. The opening modes of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d in each of the stop symbols “D1 and D2” are configured to be different. Specifically, in the non-time shortening gaming state, when “D1” is stopped as the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, the open mode is (0.2 seconds open → closed). In addition, when “D2” stops, the open mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → open for 5 seconds → closed). On the other hand, when "D1" is stopped in the time saving gaming state, the opening mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 2 seconds open → 1 second closed → 2.2 seconds open → closed). In addition, when “D2” is stopped, the open mode is (1.2 seconds open → 0.8 seconds closed → 4 seconds open → closed).

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) or (2) in FIG. 8 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is the requirement for satisfaction of the change start condition according to the determination of step 1403. In the second embodiment, the fact that the player is not in a small hit game is the change start condition. It is an additional requirement for fulfillment. Further, as a further difference, step 1412 (second), step 1550 (second), step 1414 (second) and step 1750 (second), and step 1434 (second) to step 1438 (second). ), That is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the stop symbol related to the main game symbol (refer to the main game table 2) in step 1410-2, based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery result. At step 1412 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the limit frequency A flag (the flag turned on in the limit frequency A state) is on. If Yes in step 1412 (second), in step 1550 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes limited frequency A fluctuation mode determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 1415. On the other hand, if No in step 1412 (second), in step 1414 (second), whether the CPUMC of the main control board M has the limit frequency B flag (flag turned on in the limit frequency B state) is on or not Determine if If Yes in step 1414 (second), in step 1750 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes limited frequency B change mode determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 1415.

  Here, the main game table 2 shown in FIG. 35 is an example of a first main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game stop symbol determination lottery table MN41-B). As shown in this figure, in the second embodiment, there are seven types of stop symbols for big hit on the first main game side, and six types of stop symbols for the second main game side, and each stop It is that a pattern is distributed by the difference of five elements. The five elements mentioned above are the number of rounds for which there is a ball (the number of rounds for long opening rounds) and the number of actual rounds (for all the rounds executed, including the number of long opening rounds and short opening rounds). Yes, may also be referred to as the number of execution rounds), presence or absence of transition to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game, presence or absence of transition to the time shortening gaming state after the end of the special game, time reduction given after the end of the special game It is the number. In addition, when winning the big hit of the second main game side, it shifts to the time saving gaming state after the special game end by all means, also, there are a plurality of big hit symbols related to the big hit relatively low winning ball winning expectation value in the big hit It is configured to exist. In the big hit (the actual number of rounds is "7") concerning the stop design "9A", the number of rounds with withdrawal is "6", but in the 1st round, the same opening mode as the small hit opening mode Aspect pattern {For example, a short opening where the predetermined number of gaming balls that are the termination condition is difficult to enter even if the gaming ball continues to be fired between the rounds (eg, 1.8 seconds open → 0.5 seconds closed ) By repeating 3 times (but without the 3rd closing time)), it is a small hit even if visualizing the opening mode of the running big winning opening in the 1st round or small hit in the said big hit Since it becomes difficult to determine whether it is a definite variation big hit, it is configured to be able to execute a reverse probability variation transition effect described later. In this case, in the subsequent six rounds (the second round and subsequent rounds) of the big hit pertaining to "9A", the big winning opening is opened in a long opening pattern, and it is configured that it is possible to obtain a ball. In addition, since it is configured not to shift to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the big hit, if you keep firing the game ball toward the big winning opening, the probability fluctuation gaming state and non-after the big hit end Transition to a time saving game state (sometimes referred to as latent probability change).

  In the case of No at step 1414 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main gaming symbol with reference to the main gaming table 3 at step 1410-3. Then, it proceeds to step 1415.

  Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 36 is an example of a first main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, even in the case of determining the variation mode related to the small hit symbol, the variation mode (refer to the same table as the case of determining the variation mode related to the big hit symbol It is configured to determine the fluctuation time). As a more preferable aspect, even in the case of a big hit, it is configured to be able to differ the lottery table for variation mode determination to be referred according to the type of symbol, and is the same for the small hit symbol and the big hit symbol corresponding to "9A" It is preferable to refer to the lottery table for determining the fluctuation mode.

  In addition, after the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1430 that the stop symbol of the main game symbol is not a big hit symbol, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the main game symbol in step 1434 (second). It is determined whether the stop symbol of is a small hit symbol. If Yes in step 1434 (second), in step 1436 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag, and proceeds to the processing of step 1450. On the other hand, if No in step 1434 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M is information for instructing the player to display the launch of the game ball in step 1438 (second). In the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1930), and the next processing (processing of step 1500) Migrate to In the second embodiment, the execution timing of the specific game end determination process of step 1450 is different from that of the present embodiment, and after the flag during fluctuation is turned off in step 1424, the process of step 1450 is executed. There is.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of limited frequency A fluctuation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 (second) of FIG. 34 in the second embodiment. First, at step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the count value of the limit frequency A counter MN 52c-1 {the counter (decrement counter) to be decremented for each change when the limit frequency A flag is on}: It is determined whether or not it is a counter value relating to the number of time reductions in which the continuous turning effect execution value (time shortening number of times to execute the effect asking about whether the time shortening gaming state continues or not, in this example, is 41, 21 or 1). In the case of Yes in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A-1 in step 1554, and based on the main gaming side random number and the result of the lottery, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main gaming symbol To step 1558. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table A-2 in step 1556, and based on the main gaming side random number and the result of the lottery, Determine the time) and proceed to step 1558. In addition, the setting of the limited frequency A flag and the limited frequency A counter shown here is triggered by the stop of the big hit symbols "2A", "2B", "4A", "4B", "6A", and "6B". A process is performed in which the flag is turned on and the value of the number of times according to the symbol is set.

  Next, at step 1558, the CPU MC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN 52c-1. Next, at step 1560, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN 52c-1 is zero. If Yes in step 1560, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the limited frequency A flag in step 1562 and shifts to step 1564. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 1560, the process proceeds to step 1564. Next, in step 1564, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the limit frequency A command (a command to the side of the sub control board S, and is determined by referring to the limit frequency table A-1 or the limit frequency table A-2. The command relating to the fluctuation time relating to the main game symbol that has been set is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1930), and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1415). In the mode shown in FIG. 37 in the second embodiment, when the value of the limit frequency counter is a predetermined value (continuous turning effect execution value), the limit frequency table A-1 is referred to, but the step is not limited. Even when the result is Yes in 1552, different tables such as the limited frequency tables A-1, A-1 ′, and A-1 ′ ′ may be used according to the limited frequency A counter value.

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1750 (second) of FIG. 34 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1752, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the limited frequency table B, and based on the main gaming side random number, the result of the lottery result, the stop symbol related to the main gaming symbol, the variation aspect (variation time) about the main gaming symbol And go to step 1754. Next, at step 1754, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the count value of the limit frequency B counter MN 52c-2 {counter (decrement counter) to be decremented at every symbol variation when the limit frequency B flag is on}. Subtract 1 from. Next, at step 1756, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN 52c-2 is zero. If Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limit frequency B flag, and proceeds to step 1760. On the other hand, if the result of step 1756 is No, the process moves to step 1760. Next, in step 1760, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a limited frequency B command (a command to the side of the sub control board S, and the variation time of the main gaming symbol determined by referring to the limited frequency table B The command concerned is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1930), and the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1415).

  Next, FIG. 39 is an example of the limited frequency table A-1, the limited frequency table A-2, and the limited frequency table B according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, when the count value of the limited frequency A counter MN 52c-1 is the continuation possibility value (when the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are, the time shortening gaming state may be ended variation) In the present example, the limit frequency table A-1 is referred to, and the limit frequency table A-2 is selected when the counter value is not the continuation possibility value. It is configured. As shown in the figure, the fluctuation time at the time of loss when referring to the limited frequency table A-2 is relatively shorter than the fluctuation time at the time of loss when referring to the limited frequency table A-1 It is configured to be In other words, when the count value of the limited frequency A counter MN 52c-1 is the continuation possibility value (in this example, 41, 21, 1), the change is made when the result of the main game symbol's success or failure is lost. The time is relatively long, and it is configured to be able to secure the execution time of the ringing effect whether or not the time reduction gaming state continues.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 34 in the second embodiment. First, the difference with this embodiment is step 1451 (second), that is, in step 1451 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. judge. If Yes in step 1451 (second), the process proceeds to step 1462. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1451 (the second), in other words, in the case where the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the processing proceeds to the next processing (the processing in step 1500) without performing the processing of steps 1462-1470. Do. Thus, in the second embodiment, unlike the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state does not end depending on the number of symbol variations, in other words, when transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game, At least the probability variation gaming state is configured not to end until the next big hit. In addition, without providing the determination process of step 1451 (the second), when controlling to the probability fluctuation gaming state, the value of the maximum value (for example, the maximum value of 2 bytes, 65535), 10000 times, etc. It is also possible to set an aspect that substantially guarantees the next big hit.

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process of step 1500 of FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1514 (second) and step 1516 (second), that is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the time reduction counter MP52c to zero in step 1508, At step 1514 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the limit frequency A counter MN52c-1 and the limit frequency B counter MN52c-2 to zero. Next, in step 1516 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limitation frequency A flag and the limitation frequency B flag, and shifts to the processing of step 1510.

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is the steps 1611 (second), 1625 (second), step 1628 (second), step 1632 (second), step 1700 (second), and step 1645 (second). 2) And, by entering the game ball into a specific area C22 provided in the special winning opening during the special game, a gaming machine capable of acquiring the right to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is over The configuration related to “type” is deleted, that is, at step 1610, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game start display instruction command (command to the side of the sub control board S) After that, in step 1611 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a launch instruction command (a command set at the start of the special game at the start of the special game. It includes information relating to whether to perform the be either right-handed run left-handed, set commands) to the sub-control board S side, the process proceeds to step 1616. After the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) in step 1624 and starts the release timer, the main control board is selected in step 1625 (second). The CPUMC of M, which will be described later, is a launch instruction command at the start of a round (a command set at the start of the round in each round, and includes information on whether left or right should be executed). And sets the command to the side of the sub control board S, and shifts to step 1626. In step 1626, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a game state information command (command to the side of the sub control board S) related to the special game, and then in step 1628 (second), the main control board M The CPU MC determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings have been made in the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20). If Yes in step 1628 (second), in step 1632 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20), and shifts to step 1634. On the other hand, if No in step 1628 (second), in step 1630, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the release timer has reached a predetermined time (for example, 29.0 seconds in the long release pattern). judge. In the case of Yes in step 1630, the process proceeds to step 1632 (second), and in the case of No in step 1630, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1800 (second)}. After the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command (command to the side of the sub control board S) in step 1644, the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1700 (second). Execute the game state determination process after the end of the special game described later. Next, in step 1645 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a launch instruction command (a command to be set at the end of the special game at the end of the special game, and whether to execute left or right Information regarding whether to execute it is included, and a command to the side of the sub control board S is set, and the process proceeds to the next process {step 1800 (second)}. By configuring in this manner, in the gaming machine where it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit based on the big hit symbol, the firing instruction command (game Set the command to notify the user of the firing direction, and set the command to the side of the sub control board S, and set the information on the indication of the firing position to the player to the side of the sub control board S By transmitting, as the launch direction recommended to the player, an appropriate launch instruction effect according to the game state is executed on the side of the secondary control board S at the timing at which it is switched from left to right or right to left. It will be possible. In addition, as an example of the opening pattern of the round of step 1618, the short opening pattern A (it does not provide the closing time after the last opening) which repeats "1.8 second opening → 0.5 closing" three times as a short opening pattern. ), There is a short opening pattern B (does not provide closing time after the last opening) which performs “1.8 seconds opening → 0.2 closing” only once, and as a long opening pattern, “29.0 seconds Long open pattern A (no closing time after the last open), "open → closed", long open pattern "1.8 sec open → 0.5 sec closed → 28.0 sec open → closed" B (there is no closing time after the last opening), and the like.

FIG. 43 shows an example of the content of a firing instruction command {a command to be set in the process of step 1625 (second)} at the start of a round in the second embodiment. In the upper part of the figure, "MODE data" and "EVENT data" corresponding to "instruction content" are listed, and the contents are as follows. In the following notation, “○ H” and “○○ B” indicate hexadecimal notation and binary notation, respectively.
Short opening pattern A: 9 CH, 04 H (00000100 B)
Short opening pattern B: 9 CH, 06 H (00000110 B)
Long release pattern A: 9 CH, 05 H (00000101 B)
Long release pattern B: 9 CH, 07 H (00000111 B)

  Here, "MODE data" is data representing the type of command (for example, a launch instruction command at the start of the special game, a launch instruction command at the start of the round, a launch instruction command at the end of the special game, etc.) “9 CH” represents that it is a launch instruction command at the start of the round. On the other hand, “EVENT data” is, for example, a 3-digit number “0” and “1” (in 3 bits) as shown in the lower part of FIG. It can be data representing an open pattern etc.). More specifically, in order from the high-order digit of the three digits, the digit of (1): "0" represents a left strike, and "1" represents information related to a right strike, and the digit of (2) “0” represents the opening pattern of the big winning opening, “1” represents the information related to the opening pattern B as the big opening opening pattern, and the digit of (3): “0” is the big winning “1” indicates that the special winning opening is opened in a long opening pattern, indicating that the mouth is opened in a short opening pattern. As a specific example, the command content (06H) in the case where the bit string for open pattern identification of “EVENT data” is “110 B” is a state where the right-handed launch mode is recommended, and The information indicates that the opening pattern is a short opening pattern B (for example, an opening pattern in which “1.8 seconds opening → 0.2 seconds opening” is performed only once). In addition, it is not limited to this example, When it is set as 2-byte data as follows, more detailed information can be transmitted about a discharge instruction | indication aspect, a big winning opening opening pattern, etc.

  Here, the instruction sent from the main control board M to the sub control board S in the gaming machine is generally composed of 2-byte data. Among them, one byte is "MODE data" and the other byte is "EVENT data". Since the most significant bit of each is a bit (identifying bit) for identifying whether it is “MODE data” or “EVENT data”, the remaining 7 bits are substantially used as a data area. The Rukoto.

  Note that one example of the firing instruction command shown in the same figure is transmitted to make it possible to identify the opening pattern of the big winning opening at the time of a big hit, and MODE data is "9DH" separately as a firing instruction command related to the gaming state. "" And the like may be prepared. When configured as such, the EVENT data may be provided with a launch instruction command relating to a gaming state in which a gaming state in which "00H" should hit left and a gaming state in which "01H" should hit right . Here, as an advantage of providing a command for instructing the recommended shooting position in the left and right direction by EVENT data being only “00H” and “01H”, there are various flags such as a main game probability change flag, a main game time short flag, and an auxiliary game time short flag. From among them, it is possible to use, as EVENT data, information whose flag is on (the state where "01H" is stored in the storage area of the RWM) as information indicating that the user is in the state of right-handedness. Can be mentioned. Also, by doing this, if it is recommended to hit the right when any of the flags relating to a plurality of gaming states is on, use the result of ORing each flag as EVENT data It is possible to avoid the complication of the process of determining whether or not each flag is on for the number of flags.

In the second embodiment, the following aspects are also possible.
(1) As described above, when detailed information can be transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side as a discharge instruction command, a plurality of open patterns (a plurality of open patterns of the big winning opening (a plurality) Even in the case of providing open times, short, long open, etc. in one round), information on the plurality of open patterns is transmitted to the side of the sub control board S by making the contents of the release instruction command different. be able to. As an example, open pattern information of each round is designated as an offset value by upper bit information, and in the least significant bit, "odd" → long open, "even" → short open Then, on the side of the sub control substrate S, it can be made possible to identify whether it is short open or long open by the information of the least significant bit. In the case where it is possible to identify which open pattern of the short open pattern and the long open pattern by the least significant bit, three types of long open patterns A to C as long open patterns and short as short open patterns When four types of open patterns A to D are provided, the number of types of short open patterns is larger than the number of types of long open patterns. A dummy command (a command with the least significant bit being an odd number) corresponding to the open pattern may be provided. Further, the combination of two or more types of commands may be used to identify the content of the discharge instruction, or all combination patterns may be configured to be provided with a number of types of discharge instruction corresponding to one to one. If it is decided to provide a firing instruction command corresponding to all patterns and one-to-one, an indication relating to a short opening even in one round (for example, notification by a negative aspect such as becoming black and white, erasing an instruction) And the indication concerning long opening (for example, notification by a positive aspect such as emitting light or accompanied by voice) may be switched.
(2) In the configuration described above, the emission instruction command is generated on the main control substrate M side, and on the secondary control substrate S side, effects such as the emission instruction display are executed based on the content specified in the emission instruction command. Although configured, the present invention is not limited thereto, and information from the main control board M side (current gaming state, special game execution start command, jackpot symbol, open command of each round, etc. information on the sub control board S side) It is good also as composition which can determine a mode of productions, such as emission indication display etc., and can perform performance etc. with production display SG based on a.
(3) In addition, when the special winning opening executes opening (short opening or long opening) a plurality of times in one round, the main control board M can transmit a firing instruction command multiple times in the round In this way, only when the sub control board S side receives an instruction command related to the long opening of the special winning opening, notification by the positive aspect (increases the display area. Strongly emits light. Performs separate display, voice , Etc. may be performed. For example, the instruction command is such as the opening mode of the big winning opening that is executed in one round, “1” → open for 29 seconds, “2” → open for 0.4 seconds, “3” → open for 2 seconds, etc. In the corresponding case, if it is an opening pattern such as “0.4 seconds open → 0.4 seconds closed → 0.4 seconds open → 0.4 seconds closed → 2 seconds open → closed” as one round, respectively At the opening timing, the emission instruction commands “2”, “2” and “3” are transmitted to the sub control substrate S side.
(4) In addition to opening time of big winning a prize opening, when plural types of closing time are provided (for example, “1 second”, “4 seconds”, “6 seconds”, etc.), the time concerning the closing concerned Also, the main control board M may be configured to be able to transmit as a launch instruction command. In such a configuration, in the case of "closing time with relatively long opening time", "4 seconds" and "6 seconds", "waiting for opening", "0 seconds after opening", etc. Alternatively, the effect display device SG may perform the display of. By configuring in this way, the big winning opening does not open even if the closing time of the big winning opening between rounds is long in order to correspond to the time of the effect to be executed during the big hit (( That is, in the disadvantageous state where the balls are not increased), it is possible to notify that the player does not use the game balls to waste. Also, the firing instruction command may be configured to be set at the end of the round (open timer value = 0 or a predetermined number winning in the special winning opening).
(5) Also, with regard to commands regarding the recommended launch position during a big hit, it is also possible to process by binary control on the side of the sub control board S to match the timing in each round according to the big hit type, as sending by binary. .

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1700 (second) of FIG. 42 in the second embodiment. First, in step 1728-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the stop symbol of the main game symbol, the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the stop symbol pertaining to the big hit transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit, Then, it is determined whether or not 3A, 5A, 7A, 9A, 3B, 5B, 7B). If Yes in step 1728-1, in step 1728-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1728-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a stop symbol indicating that the stop symbol is a stop symbol pertaining to a big hit that does not shift to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the big hit symbol. It is determined whether it is 9A). If Yes in step 1728-3, in step 1728-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value A (65535 in this example) in the time reduction number counter MP52c. Here, by setting a sufficiently large value as the predetermined value A, the probability fluctuation gaming state can be substantially continued until the next big hit. In the structure shown in FIG. 40, the time reduction counter MP52c is not decremented in the gaming state in the probability variation gaming state, so the predetermined value A set here may be any value (a predetermined value Even if A is not set), the probability fluctuation gaming state continues until the next big hit.

  Next, in step 1728-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M is the stop symbol of the main game symbol, which is the stop symbol pertaining to the big hit transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the big game is defeated. It is determined whether or not it is a big hit in which the effect defeated by the battle effect during the big hit is executed, and in this example is 3B). If Yes in step 1728-5, in step 1728-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN 52c-1 to a predetermined value (60 in this example). Next, in step 1728-7, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency A flag, and shifts to step 1728-11. On the other hand, if No in step 1728-5, the process goes to step 1728-11. In the case of No at step 1728-1, that is, when the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol is 2A, 4A, 6A, 2B, 4B or 6B, the CPUMC of the main control board M at step 1728-8. The time reduction number-of-times counter MP52c is set to the time reduction number based on the jackpot pattern (20 times in the case of 2A · 2B, 40 times in the case of 4A · 4B, 60 times in the case of 6A · 6B). Next, at step 1728-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the same value (in this example, 20 times, 40 times or 60 times) as the time reduction number set in the time reduction number counter MP52c to the limited frequency A counter MN52c. Set to -1. Next, in step 1728-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency A flag, and shifts to step 1728-11. Next, in step 1728-11 and step 1728-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag and turns on the auxiliary game time short flag, and performs the next process {step 1645 (second) Transition to the processing of Also in the case of No at 1728-3, the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 1645 (second process)}.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 (second) of FIG. 31 in the second embodiment. First, at step 1802, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the small hit flag is on. If Yes in step 1802, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag in step 1804. Next, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M is preferably an open pattern similar to the open pattern for the round (the small hit game) {the open pattern of the big winning opening at the short open big hit, for example, , An opening pattern A (no closing time after the last opening is not provided) repeating “1.8 seconds opening → 0.5 seconds closing” three times, etc. is set. Next, in step 1808, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1809, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first large winning opening C10 and starts the small hit gaming open timer. Next, in step 1810, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a special game start display instruction command (command to the side of the sub control board S). Preferably, during the small hit game, the same effect as that during the special game is executed. Next, in step 1811, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a launch instruction command (command to the sub side) at the start of the small hit game, and proceeds to step 1814. On the other hand, if No in step 1802, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1812 whether the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1812, the process moves to step 1814.

  Next, in step 1814, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings have been made in the first large winning opening C10. In the case of Yes at step 1814, the process goes to step 1818. On the other hand, if No in step 1814, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the small hit game opening timer in step 1816 for a predetermined time (for example, “1.8 seconds open → It is determined whether or not "closing for 0.5 seconds" is repeated three times and then closing has elapsed. If Yes in step 1816, then the process moves to step 1818.

  Next, in step 1818, the CPU MC of the main control board M stops the driving of the first large winning opening electric combination C11d and closes the first large winning opening C10. Next, in step 1820, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops and resets the small hit gaming timer. Next, at step 1822, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 1823, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a special game end display instruction command (command to the side of the sub control board S). Next, in step 1824, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a launch instruction command (command to the side of the sub control board S) at the end of the small hit game. Next, at step 1825, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time short flag is off. If Yes in step 1825, in step 1826, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limit frequency B flag. Next, in step 1830, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the limited frequency B counter a predetermined number of times (10 in this example), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1910). Also in the case of No at step 1812, step 1816, or step 1825, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1910).

  It should be noted that after the small hitting game is finished, it is configured to shift to the limited frequency B state on the condition that it is not a time saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. Depending on the hit symbol, it may be different whether or not to shift to the limited frequency state. Also, as a big hit, for example, the number of execution rounds is 2 rounds, and the opening pattern of “1.8 seconds open → 0.5 seconds closed” in the first round is twice “1.8 seconds open in the second round The jackpot pattern is executed once (no closing time after opening at the end of each round) and a jackpot to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the jackpot is completed, ie, the jackpot for 2 rounds in the jackpot The opening mode (apparent opening and closing) of the winning opening is configured to be the same as the opening mode (apparent opening and closing) of the large winning opening in the small hit, and the limited frequency state after the big hit end and the small hit end It may be configured to be able to shift to By configuring as such, it is configured that the player can not recognize which gaming state is (probable fluctuation gaming state or not) at the big hit and the small hit end time, and in the limited frequency state By executing an effect that suggests or informs of the gaming state of the game, it is possible to realize gaming characteristics that suggest the current gaming state by changing the symbol.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a main flowchart of the sub control substrate S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is step 2700 (second) and step 2750 (second), that is, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the special game related display control process. After that, at step 1700 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a firing position notification control process described later. Next, in step 2750 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a stay stage determination process, which will be described later, and shifts to the process of step 2020.

  Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 of FIG. 46 in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the processing shown in the figure is common to both the processing relating to the special game and the processing relating to the small hit. First, the difference from the present embodiment is the step 2550 (second), that is, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the winning number in the step 2612, the step 2550 (the At 2), the CPUSC of the secondary control board S executes a special game effect execution process described later, and proceeds to step 2614.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) of FIG. 47 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the big hit of the first main game side is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a battle execution big hit symbol (a symbol pertaining to a big hit that a battle effect will be executed during a big hit, 2A · 3A in this example) Determine whether or not the jackpot according to 4A, 5A, 6A) is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2556 is a symbol relating to a big hit in which a winning effect is executed in a battle effect during the big win. Determine whether or not the big hit according to 5A) is in progress. If Yes in step 2556, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for executing battle victory effects, and proceeds to step 2568. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2554 (ie, when the symbol relating to the big hit being executed is 7A, 9A), at step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays the time saving no big hit symbol (no time after the big hit ends) It is a big hit symbol which shifts to the shortening game state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 9A). In the case of Yes in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs reverse positive probability transition effect (for example, when the first round is finished, the big hit or small hit is finished on the effect display device SG) in step 2564 After the effect that the display on the screen explodes is executed and the characters “probable change confirmed!” Are displayed after that, the game is played after the second round. Set the command to execute the blessing effect to execute the blessed person), and the process moves to step 2568. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2562 (ie, 7A in this example), the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a blessing effect (effect of notifying transition to the probability change gaming state after the special game ends) at step 2566. Set the command to be executed, and proceed to step 2568. In the case of No in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2560 does not notify the battle defeat effect (the state of shifting to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game, and after the end of the special game The command to execute the effect may be set in the case of transition to the probability variation gaming state and the case of transition to the non-probability variation gaming state, and the procedure proceeds to step 2568. Also in the case of No at step 2552, the process moves to step 2568.

  Next, in step 2568, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the big hit on the second main game side is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2568, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a big hit symbol after battle victory (a big hit symbol whose effect is executed after battle victory during execution of the special game in step 2570, 5B · in this example). 7B) It is determined whether or not the big hit according to the present invention is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2570, the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2572 is an effect after battle victory (an effect to be executed during a big hit on the second main game side won in the probability change gaming state, After completion, a command to execute the effect to bless the player to be executed when shifting to the probability variation gaming state is set, and the process shifts to step 2576. On the other hand, if No in step 2570, that is, if the big hit symbol pertaining to the running big hit is 2B, 3B, 4B, 6B, in step 2574, the CPUSC of the sub control board S produces after battle defeat (probability change It is an effect to be executed during the jackpot of the second main game side won in the gaming state, and executed either when transitioning to the probability fluctuation gaming state or after transitioning to the non probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of the jackpot It is an effect to be obtained, for example, it is displayed as "evening stage entry!" In addition, when the special game end demonstration time is provided, it may be displayed as "evening stage entry!" The command to be executed is set, and the process moves to step 2576. On the other hand, if No in step 2568, the process moves to step 2576. Here, in the second embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state, it is configured to notify the gaming state transitioning after the end of the jackpot won by the effect during the symbol fluctuation related to the jackpot symbol, specifically, The battle production is executed during the symbol fluctuation time according to the big hit symbol, and when the battle production is won, it shifts to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end concerning the big hit symbol, and loses the battle production, the big hit After the big hit concerning the design ends, it moves to non probability fluctuation game state. As described above, since the player recognizes the gaming state after the big hit when the big hit is executed, during the big hit concerning the big hit symbol of the second main game side elected in the probability variation gaming state, It is configured not to be executed such as to play the game state transitioning after the big hit end. Next, in step 2576, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a small hit is in progress. If Yes in step 2576, in step 2578, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays an effect during small hit (an effect to be executed during a small hit, for example, “empty stage” rush! Is displayed. Small hit) When an end demonstration time is provided, a command to execute “empty stage entry!” Is set at the end demonstration time, and the process shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2614). Also in the case of No at step 2576, the process proceeds to step 2614.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) of FIG. 46 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2747-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the content of the emission instruction command received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 2747-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the launch instruction command relates to right-handed content. If Yes in step 2747-2, in step 2748-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the first notification image (right-handed) on the effect display device SG. Here, the "notification image" is an effect to notify the shooting direction and the firing intensity of the gaming ball recommended to the player, and the gaming area to be launched, and mainly when the gaming state (state) changes {At the start of the jackpot, at the transition of gaming state, at the end of the jackpot, etc.}, for example, "right strike", "left strike", "return to left", "aim at the big winning opening", This is an image for notifying "Aim for V (specific region C22)" or the like. Next, in step 2747-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the second notification image on the effect display device SG.

  In addition, as a specific example of the configuration relating to other notification images applicable to the present example, the right relating to the start of the big hit can be temporarily held until the game ball passes a specific area (for example, the big hit symbol stops) After that, if the jackpot is not started until the game ball passes through the auxiliary game start port H10, the notification is given to shoot the game ball toward the specific area (for example, the auxiliary game start port H10) It may be configured to

Here, the configuration regarding the notification image according to the present example will be described in detail.
(1) Of the notification images, the first notification image is an image displayed in the entire vicinity of the center of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. The first notification image (right-handed) has a mode in which the arrow pointing to the right is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG, and it is easy to enter the ball by right-handed in a situation where the game should be played with left-handed It will be displayed by detecting the ball entering the ball entrance (for example, general winning a prize opening) which is difficult to enter the ball by hitting the left. In addition, the first notification image (left hit) has a mode in which a left-pointing arrow is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG, and in a situation where a game should be played by left hit, the ball is hit by left hit. It will be displayed by detecting the ball entering a ball entry (for example, the first main game starting port) which is difficult to hit by hitting the ball right. Note that the first notification image indicates the recommended launch position at the game state transition timing (in particular, the recommended launch position is changed (left to right or right to left, etc. change timing of the gaming state)). It plays a role of informing, and the display is erased when the predetermined effect time has elapsed, or when the predetermined ending condition is satisfied (the informing image is not always displayed).
(2) Of the notification images, the second notification image is an image displayed in a band shape in the upper right portion of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, and the time shortening gaming state and the execution of special games (playing state is It is a notification image which is always displayed during a specific game period such as non-time shortening game state). In addition, the second right-handed notification image (left-handed) may be displayed when it is a gaming state where it is necessary to execute the left hitting of the non-time shortening gaming state where the special game is not executed (for example, in the right channel) When the arranged second main game starting opening electric role B11d is activated).
(3) Of the notification images, the third notification image is an image displayed in a band at the upper end and the lower end of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, and a notification that is always displayed mainly during the execution of the special game It is an image. In the present embodiment, the third notification image is displayed during the special game, but in the other embodiments, the second notification image is displayed instead of the third notification image during the special game. The third notification image may be displayed when the special winning opening is in the open state, and the second notification image may be displayed when the closing period is in progress.
(4) Of the notification images, the "fourth notification image" is displayed in a relatively smaller range than the first notification image or the second notification image below the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. It is an image, and it has an aspect in which the arrow pointing to the right and the arrow pointing to the left are vertically aligned. Also, the fourth notification image is an image that is basically always displayed as well as immediately after a change in gaming state or during a specific gaming period, and is not limited to on the effect display device SG, but may be displayed on other effect displays. For example, it may be provided in the center decoration D38 as the above-mentioned launch instruction display section HS, or may be arranged side by side with the first main game symbol display device A20. In addition, the fourth notification image is a game situation that should be fired by right-handling, but a period during which the player does not benefit even if right-handling is executed (for example, a big win during a special game) In the closing period of the mouth), the fourth notification image is configured to be "non-displayed", "blinking display", or "display changed light emission color or brightness, transmittance", and the "non-display" When the display does not indicate "flashing display" or the like, it is always displayed as "right lighting" or "left lighting".
(5) Of the notification images, the fifth notification image is an image displayed in the entire vicinity of the center of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG. In the fifth notification image (left strike), a left-pointing arrow (with a diagonal stripe texture attached) with the text “left strike” is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG A ball entry that is easy to enter with a right hit and difficult to hit with a left hit (for example, right general winning opening, right auxiliary game start opening, second) (2) A game will be displayed by detecting a predetermined number A within a predetermined period A, etc., of entering the ball into the main game start port). In the fifth notification image (right-handed), a right-pointing arrow (with a diagonal stripe texture attached) with the word "right-handed" is displayed over the entire screen of the effect display device SG In the situation where you should play a game with a right hit, a ball entry that is easy to hit by left hit and hard to hit by right hit (for example, first main game start opening, left side general winnings The ball entering the mouth is displayed by detecting a predetermined number B within a predetermined period B or the like. The fifth notification image plays a role of warning or warning, and the display is erased (the notification image is not always displayed) when the cause of the warning is eliminated.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, next, in step 2747-4, the CPUSC of the sub control board S newly detects the first main game start opening entrance ball detection command (into the first main game start opening A10 It is such a command, and it is easier to enter the first main game start slot A10 when entering a left strike than when hitting a right). judge. If YES in step 2747-4, in step 2747-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fifth notification image (right-handed) on the effect display device SG. The fifth notification image is erased after a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds to 10 seconds) elapses after the display (in the period in which the fifth notification image is displayed, The display of the displayed first notification image is erased). Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined that the player is firing the game ball to the normal launch position, for example, when it is determined on the side of the sub control board S, or the player changes the game state etc. When the launch position of the is the normal launch position, it may be configured to be deleted, or may be configured to display a message such as "OK" to the launch to the normal launch position. That is, the condition for ending the display of the fifth notification image may be appropriately changed in accordance with the game property. Next, in step 2747-6, the CPUSC of the sub control board S outputs a voice of "right-handed!" From the right speaker D24R using CH different from BGM and other effect sound, and step 2747- Migrate to 7. On the other hand, if the result of step 2747-4 is NO, the process proceeds to step 2747-7. Next, in step 2747-7, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the dead shot condition is satisfied. Here, the dead-hit conditions are, for example, the time between rounds in the big hit, the big hit start demonstration time, the big hit end demo time, the round opening execution pattern of the big winning opening becomes a short open pattern, and the counter of the time reduction counter MP52c Time reduction when the value becomes 0 During the fluctuation fixed time after the end of the final fluctuation of the gaming state, etc., even if you launch the game ball by right-handed, do not enter the big winning opening, in the second main game starting opening It is configured to be satisfied when it is not advantageous for the player, such as not entering the ball. With regard to the situation determination regarding these wasted shots, the main control board M with respect to the sub control board S at the start and end of the big hit, at the start and end of each round, of the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d It is judged by appropriately receiving information such as the start of operation, the end of operation, and the end of symbol variation.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2747-7, in step 2747-8, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fourth notification image in "non-lighting", and the next processing {step 2750 Move to the (second) process}. In the second embodiment, although the game situation is to be fired by hitting the right, the period during which the player does not benefit even if the right strike is performed (for example, the special winning opening during the execution of the special game) In the closing period), the fourth notification image is configured to be "non-displayed", but the display mode of the fourth display image is not limited to this, and can be distinguished from "right lighting", and further " The display mode may be any display mode capable of recognizing that the game ball is not shot at a high profit by firing the ball rightward than in the case of right lighting ", for example," display with right lighting in gray scale "," right It may be configured to display "flashing" or the like. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2747-7, at step 2747-9, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fourth notification image at “right turn on”, and the next processing {step Transfer to 2750 (second processing). In the case of No at step 2747-2, that is, when the launch instruction command is content relating to left hitting, at step 2748-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sends the first notification image (in the effect display device SG). Set the command to display left). Next, in step 2747-10, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a general winning a prize entrance ball detection command (a command relating to having entered a regular winning opening P10 provided on the right side of the board, a general winning prize It is determined whether or not the mouth P10 is easier to enter when the right strike is performed than when the left strike is performed). If Yes in step 2747-10, in step 2747-11, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fifth notification image (left hit) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2747-12, the CPUSC of the sub control board S outputs a voice of "left-handed!" From the speaker left D24L using CH different from BGM and other effect sound, and step 2747- Migrate to 13. As described above, in the second embodiment, when suggesting that the game ball is to be emitted by hitting left in the fifth notification image, the voice is output from the speaker left D24L, and the right is hit in the second notification image. When suggesting to fire the game ball, it is configured to output a sound from the speaker right D24R, that is, the game ball should be fired by hitting the left (right) visually and aurally It is comprised so that the effect can be recognized. On the other hand, if the result of step 2747-10 is NO, the process proceeds to step 2747-13. Next, in step 2747-13, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fourth notification image with "left handed", and proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 2750 (second)}. Do. As described above, in the second embodiment, as the display mode of the first notification image, the second notification image, and the fourth implementation image, an image instructing right strike and an image instructing left strike can be displayed. It is done. In this example, it is determined that the player is performing a right-handed game by entering the general winning opening P10, but it is not limited to this. The passing of the auxiliary game start opening H10, It is good also as composition judged by entering into 2 main game starting mouth B10.

  Next, the same figure shows the notification image (first notification image, second notification image, fourth notification image (right light), fourth notification image (left light), fourth notification image according to the second embodiment. This is an example of (non-lighting), fifth notification image (left), and fifth notification image (right) Note that the left notification image related to the first notification image and the second notification image is omitted. First, the first notification image should be fired at the center of the effect display device SG at the center of the effect display device SG in a relatively larger range (area) than the second notification image. On the other hand, the second notification image is an image to notify the player that the player should hit the right within a relatively smaller range on the upper right side of the effect display device SG than the first notification image. There is a mode (it is difficult to overlap even if other effects (variation of a decorative symbol or battle effect) are executed at the center) The situation where it is difficult to disturb the visibility of other effects of (a), and the notification of the recommended launch position can not be completely viewed (or the period in which the visibility becomes invisible as short as possible) The fourth notification image is an image displayed in a range relatively smaller than the first notification image or the second notification image below the left of the effect display device SG, and is indicated by an arrow pointing to the right. The arrow pointing to the left is arranged vertically, and more specifically, (1) in the fourth notification image, the right arrow is lit in the image for displaying the normal right-handling instruction. (2) During the special game, or during the time-saving game, the image displaying the instruction for normal left strike in the fourth notification image has a mode in which the left arrow is lit. (3) Also, In the case where the condition for wasted shot is satisfied (for example, In the case where the player fires the game ball, the situation displayed in the case where the player has almost no possibility of obtaining a profit) is a mode in which none of the arrows light up. While the fourth notification image (right lit) and the fourth notification image (left lit) clearly instruct the player the position where the game ball should be fired, the position where the game ball should be fired is not notified. The fourth notification image is also a mode that is unlikely to overlap with other effects that may be displayed at the center, and notification of the recommended emission position is completely invisible. The situation of the fourth notification image is not limited to this example, and, for example, the arrow on the right side Right-handed letters, etc., left arrow (left The character may be displayed to be switched, and the display may be extinguished if the useless condition is satisfied, or the player is satisfied with the useless condition as gray scale or blinking display. It may be configured to notify that it is present. In addition, even in the case of an image for which the notification image is constantly displayed, such as in the case of super reach or the like, it may be configured not to be displayed, thereby providing the player with a more uplifting feeling. On the other hand, without providing a display for preventing such wasted shots, it is also possible to be configured to always notify right and left strikes. In the fifth notification image (right-handed), a right-pointing arrow (with a diagonal stripe texture attached) with the word "right-handed" is displayed over the entire screen of the effect display device SG It is an aspect that In the fifth notification image (left-handed), a left-pointing arrow (with a diagonal striped texture attached) with the word "left-handed" is displayed over the entire screen of the effect display device SG It is an aspect that The fifth notification image plays a role of warning and alerting.

  By configuring as described above, when the player executes a left-handed game in a situation where the player should perform a right-handed game, the notification image in a more positive manner in the processing on the side of the sub control board S Can be displayed, and when instructing to hit the right, a speaker right D24R provided on the right outputs a voice instructing to hit the right, and when instructing to hit the left, The speaker left D24L provided on the left side is configured to output a voice for instructing left hitting, and the player is firing the game ball to an inappropriate (incorrect) firing position. Can be recognized visually and intuitively by hearing. Note that these sounds were output on the same CH by configuring to output on a CH different from normal BGM and effect sound (output on a speaker different from the speaker that outputs BGM). In this case, by combining with the effect sound, it is possible to prevent the problem that the volume can be increased momentarily, the speaker may become abnormal, and the like can not be notified to the player. In addition, since only the left and right speakers switch the CH to a dedicated one, the effect sound can be output on the other side, and it is possible to prevent lowering of the amusement of the game without interruption of the sound concerning the effect. be able to. Note that in the case where the player has fired the game ball to an inappropriate (incorrect) firing position, sound may be output from both speakers D24. As an example, the fifth notification image, which is a notification image when it is desired to emphasize and notify the player when alerting the player, outputs voice from the speakers of both the speaker right D24R and the speaker left D24L to the player. The second notification image, which is a notification image when notification is desired to be emphasized without highlighting (in the case of instructing only), the second notification image (right-handed) is output only from the speaker right D24R, and the second notification image The left strike may be configured to output only from the speaker left D24L. By configuring in this way, when displaying a second notification image for which the warning is not the purpose, by matching the firing direction and the direction of the voice output, it is possible to help understand the progression of the game, while the warning The fifth notification image, which is an object, can surely notify (warning) the player even if a problem occurs in either the speaker right D24R or the speaker left D24L (for example, the left strike). If the speaker left D24L is configured to output sound only when warning is given, if you hit the right while making a mistake with respect to the speaker left D24L, an effect sound is output from the speaker right D24R, and the game is normally played. Can be prevented from appearing to be progressing). Further, under the situation where the player should hit left, when the player does not detect the inappropriate launch of the game ball, the second notification image is not displayed, while the first notification image, the first notification image, In the 4th display image which is an aspect inconspicuous than 2 alerting | reporting images and a 5th alerting | reporting image, it can alert | report that right-handed should be performed continuously.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second) of FIG. 46 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the stay stage switching timing {the stay stage switching timing, for example, the timing at which the special game has ended (is won), the timing at which the gaming state has shifted, It is determined whether or not the variation mode determination table has been switched, even if it is in the gaming state, or the timing when the number of times of variation has reached a predetermined number, etc.}. In the case of Yes at step 2752, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines at step 2754 whether or not it is after the end of the special game having received the command to execute the battle defeat effect from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the "evening stage" as a stay stage, and shifts to step 2767. If NO in step 2754, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2758 whether or not the limited frequency B command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 2758, in step 2760, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets "empty stage" as a stay stage, and shifts to step 2767. If No in step 2758, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2762 whether or not it is in the time shortening gaming state. If Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the “space stage” as the stay stage, and shifts to step 2767. Further, if No in step 2762, in other words, in the non-time shortening gaming state, in step 2766, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the “ground stage” as a stay stage, and shifts to step 2767. Next, in step 2767, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a separate display designation command (with a command to the sub sub control board side to designate the display presence / absence of the notification image, the type of notification image to be displayed, and the display position of the notification image). If the sub-sub control board receives the command, the notification image is displayed on the effect display device SG), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2020). Also in the case of No at step 2752, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 2020). Thus, after the big hit end when the battle defeat production is executed during the big hit (There are cases where it is a non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state and when it is a probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state) "Evening stage" is set, and it is a case where it shifts to the probability fluctuation game state and time shortening game state after the big hit, and when the battle defeat production is not executed during the big hit (during the big hit, the battle victory production and blessing "Space stage" is set after the big hit, and "empty stage" is set after the small hit (after receiving the command to execute the small hit). If it is a non-time shortening gaming state (including after the big hit end concerning the time reduction without big hit symbol), "ground stage" will be set, that is, of the main game symbol Stop pattern and, by playing state after the end of the special game state, set the stay stage is configured differently.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the gaming state transitioning after the big hit ends, the number of times granted, the number of rounds executed during the big hit, by the stop symbol relating to the big hit The display is configured to be different from the main control board M side, and the processing on the sub control board S side induces the player to proceed with the correct game at an appropriate timing by the processing on the side (especially, the right strike And, it is possible to display an instruction prompting a left strike, and it is a user-friendly model for the player.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Based on the information from the main control board M side, by the processing on the sub control board S side, a display (in particular, an instruction display prompting a right strike and a left strike) to guide the player to proceed with the correct game at an appropriate timing. The aspect to be performed is not limited to this, and another aspect of the processing on the side of the sub control substrate S will be described in detail as only a modification from the second embodiment as a first modification from the second embodiment.

  First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) of FIG. 46 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2150 (second variation 1) and step 2250 (second variation 1), that is, in step 2747-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is an effect display device. After setting a command to display the second notification image on SG, in step 2150 (second modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes rightward image display control processing described later, and proceeds to step 2747-7. Transition. In the case of No at step 2747-2, in other words, when the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the launch instruction command relates to left-handed content, the sub control board is determined at step 2250 (second modification 1). The CPUSC of S executes a left-handed image display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2747-13.

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of right-turned image display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 (second modification 1) of FIG. 51 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2152, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the first start opening confirmation flag (the flag for monitoring the ball entry rate of the first main game start opening A10) is off. If Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether a new first main game start opening ball detection command has been received. In the case of Yes at step 2154, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the first starting opening confirmation flag at step 2156. Next, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the first start opening confirmation timer MP21t (a timer for managing a period during which the ball entering rate to the first main game start opening A10 is monitored, a decrement timer). A predetermined value (30 seconds in this example) is set and started, and the process shifts to the process of step 2164. On the other hand, if No in step 2152, in step 2160, the CPUSC of the sub control board S (under the condition that the first start opening confirmation flag is turned on) newly performs the first main game start opening ball detection command It is determined whether or not it has been received. If Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the first starting opening ball percentage counter MP61c, and proceeds to step 2164.

  Next, in step 2164, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value of the first starting opening ball percentage counter MP 61 c is smaller than the notification value (two in this example). In the case of Yes in step 2164, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2166 whether the timer value of the first starting opening confirmation timer MP 21 t is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2166, the process moves to step 2171. On the other hand, if No in step 2164, in step 2168, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the first notification image (right-handed) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses a CH different from BGM and other effect sound, and outputs a sound of “right-handed!” Do. Next, in step 2171, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the counter value of the first starting opening ball percentage counter MP61c to zero. Next, in step 2172, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the first starting opening confirmation flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2747-7). Also in the case of No in step 2154 or step 2166, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2747-7).

  By configuring as described above, in a situation where a game should be right-handed on game progress, a predetermined number (three in this example) of first main game start slots is entered in a predetermined period (30 seconds in this example) When there is a ball (that is, when the game is executed by hitting the left), the effect display device SG displays the first notification image in addition to the second notification image, and the right speaker 24 D It will be possible to output a strike instruction. As described above, even if the player recognizes that the player should play the game by right-handling, the above notification is executed when, for example, the game ball is accidentally shot to the left and immediately returned to right-hand. On the other hand, the above notification (informing by the first notification image) as a warning can be executed only when the player continues the left strike with the intention to continue the game by the left strike. There is. The predetermined value set in the first start opening confirmation timer MP21t and the value of the notification value (two in this example) are not limited to these, and can be appropriately changed according to the configuration of the gaming machine or the like. Moreover, the requirements for executing the above-mentioned warning (notification) are not limited to this example. For example, as a method for the sub control board S to recognize that the player is performing left strike, (1) the general winning opening P10 is provided on the left side of the gaming area D30. The left hitting may be detected by the general winning a prize entrance detection device P11s provided, and (2) the left hitting is performed as a sensor is provided at any position where the gaming ball on the left side of the game area D30 flows down. May be detected. In addition, as a method of counting gaming balls, (A) timer processing for measuring a predetermined period is repeatedly executed, and there is an entering (or passage) of a plurality of inappropriate gaming balls within any period. (B) It may be configured to require that there is a predetermined number of improper ball entry (or passage) without performing timer processing. In the case of (B), the counter may be cleared at the time of power-off, at the time of transition to the stand-by demonstration, or when a predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, although the determination of these requirements is processed on the side of the sub control substrate S, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be performed on the side of the main control substrate M. In addition, when it fulfills the requirement which performs the alerting | reporting mentioned above, it comprised immediately and alerting | reporting was comprised, but it is not limited to this, Only the flag to the effect of satisfy | filling the requirement is turned on, A alerting | reporting image is displayed If it is not appropriate, the notification image may be displayed after the situation is resolved. For example, when it is considered that the display of the notification image is not good in appearance, such as during reach, the notification may be performed after the end of the reach. In addition, it may be configured so as not to count the above-mentioned improper game ball entering itself during reach, a specific determination period (for example, during symbol temporary stop, immediately before the start of symbol fluctuation, during fluctuation fixed time, etc. ) May be configured to count improper game ball entry (for example, one ball). The configuration in which immediate notification is given is preferable from the viewpoint of the disadvantage of the player, and on the other hand, the mode in which the flag is turned on to be notified later concentrates on reach effects etc. and reduces the influence on the entertainingness of the effects. It is suitable from the viewpoint. In addition, during reach production, it may notify immediately in a small and unobtrusive aspect, and may be configured to switch to a noticeable aspect after the end of reach production.

  Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of left-turning image display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second modification 1) of FIG. 51 in the first modification from the second embodiment. First, at step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the general winning opening confirmation flag (a flag for monitoring the pitch of the general winning opening P10 disposed on the right side of the game board) is off. Determine If Yes in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2254 whether or not a general winning a prize entering ball detection command is newly received. In the case of Yes in step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on a general winning opening confirmation flag in step 2256. Next, in step 2258, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a timer for managing a general winning opening confirmation timer MP22t (a period for monitoring a pitch entering the general winning opening P10, a decrement timer) having a predetermined value In the example, 10 seconds is set and started, and the process proceeds to step 2264. On the other hand, if No in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S newly receives a general winning opening entrance detection command (under the condition that the general winning opening confirmation flag is on) in step 2260. Determine if If Yes in step 2260, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds 1 to the counter value of the general winning a prize entry ball percentage counter MP62c in step 2262, and proceeds to step 2264.

  Next, in step 2264, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the counter value of the general winning opening ball percentage counter MP62c is smaller than the notification value (two in this example). If Yes in step 2264, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2266 whether the timer value of the general winning opening confirmation timer MP22t is zero. If Yes in step 2266, then the process proceeds to step 2271. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2264, at step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the first notification image (left hit) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2270, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses a CH different from BGM and other effect sound, and outputs a sound of “left-handed!” From the speaker left D24L, and the process proceeds to step 2271 Do. Next, in step 2271, the CPUSC of the sub control board S clears the counter value of the general winning a prize entrance ball percentage counter MP 62 c to zero. Next, in step 2272, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the general winning opening confirmation flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2747-13). Also in the case of No in step 2254 or step 2266, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2747-13). In FIGS. 52 and 53, the first notification image is configured to be displayed when the first main game starting opening or the general winning opening has a predetermined number of balls in a predetermined period, but a warning is issued. The fifth notification image may be displayed to the effect that

  By configuring as described above, in the situation where the player should hit left on the game progress, the general winning opening P10 provided on the right side of the game area D30 as viewed from the player is kept for a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example) In addition to the second notification image, the first notification image is displayed on the effect display device SG when there is a predetermined number (three in the present example) of entering the ball, and the left light is emitted on the speaker left D24L. It will be possible to output a voice of instruction. In this way, when the player accidentally shoots the game ball to the right while recognizing that the player should play with the left, and then immediately returns to the left, the above notification is difficult to be executed, and the player The above notification as a warning can be executed only when the player is continuing to hit the game with the intention of continuing the game by hitting the right. The predetermined value set in the general winning opening confirmation timer MP22t and the value of the notification value are not limited to these, and can be appropriately changed according to the configuration of the gaming machine or the like. Moreover, the requirements for executing the above-mentioned warning (notification) are not limited to this example. For example, as a method for the secondary control board S to recognize that the player is performing a right strike, (1) even if a sensor is provided at any position where the gaming ball on the right side of the gaming area D30 flows down. (2) The game may be entered (or passed) to the auxiliary game start port H10 and the second main game start port B10. In addition, as a requirement for notification, (A) Repeat timer processing of a predetermined period may be performed, and it may be a requirement that there is an entering (or passage) of a plurality of inappropriate gaming balls within each period. And (B) it may be configured to require that there is a predetermined number of improper ball entry (or passage) without executing timer processing. In addition, (C) the information that the number of reservations on the auxiliary game side has become equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, 2 or more) may be received from the main control board M as a command. Limited to the configuration to arrange the game start port). In the case of (B), the counter may be cleared at the time of power-off, at the time of transition to a stand-by demonstration, or when a predetermined time elapses, and in the case of control as in (C), the auxiliary game Even if one or two balls happen to pass through the starting opening H10, the information of the notification condition is automatically subtracted by performing the symbol variation of the auxiliary game symbol, so it is not necessary to provide a separate counter . In addition, although the determination of these requirements is processed on the side of the sub control substrate S, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be performed on the side of the main control substrate M. In addition, when it fulfills the requirement which performs the alerting | reporting mentioned above, it comprised immediately and alerting | reporting was comprised, but it is not limited to this, Only the flag to the effect of satisfy | filling the requirement is turned on, A alerting | reporting image is displayed If it is not appropriate, the notification image may be displayed after the situation is resolved. For example, when it is considered that the display of the notification image does not look good, such as during reach effect, the notification may be executed after the end of the reach effect. In addition, during reach may be configured not to count the ball entry itself of the above-mentioned inappropriate gaming balls, a specific determination period (for example, during symbol temporary stop, just before the start of symbol fluctuation, during fluctuation fixed time) It is good also as composition which counts entering balls in only (for example, 1 ball). The configuration in which immediate notification is given is preferable from the viewpoint of the disadvantage of the player, and on the other hand, the mode in which the flag is turned on to be notified later concentrates on reach effects etc. and reduces the influence on the entertainingness of the effects. It is suitable from the viewpoint. In addition, during reach production, it may notify immediately in a small and unobtrusive aspect, and may be configured to switch to a noticeable aspect after the end of reach production.

  As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when the player mistakenly launches the game ball with an inappropriate launch intensity, it is normal unless the launch of the inappropriate game sphere is continued. It is possible to provide a user-friendly model by configuring so as not to execute a notification prompting a game based on the firing intensity of the game ball and preventing the notification from being an excessive notification for the player.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, the first notification image is displayed when a predetermined number of improper ball entry of game balls is detected during a predetermined period, but it is inappropriate. The mode of monitoring the entry of a game ball is not limited to this. For example, when one ball enters a given entrance, a predetermined period from the entry timing is a preparation period, and the preparation period is An error may be notified when a predetermined number of spheres is detected. In addition, although the monitoring control of the improper ball entry is configured to be performed on the sub control board S side, the present invention is not limited thereto, and an inappropriate ball impact is detected by the processing on the main control board M side. The determination information may be transmitted to the sub control substrate S side.

Third Embodiment
In the second embodiment, in response to the progress of the game, in response to the player's improper launch of the game ball, notification is performed by the process of the sub control board S based on the information (command) from the main control board M side. In addition to the configuration described above, the configuration for notifying the player to interrupt the launch of the game ball is described in detail for the useless game ball launch that is disadvantageous to the player, but such a configuration is not limited to this. Hereinafter, only the differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail as to another aspect of preventing the game ball from being shot dead for the player.

  First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. 4 in the third embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is the step 1110 (third), that is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M adds one auxiliary game holding ball in the step 1108, the step 1110 (third) is performed. , CPUSC of the secondary control board S, sets the auxiliary game reserve number command (information related to the reserve number of the auxiliary game side with the reserve sphere increased, a command to be sent to the secondary control board S side), the next processing It transfers to (the process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the motorized product drive drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 4 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1223 (third), step 1231-1 (third) to step 1231-3 (third), and step 1245 (third), that is, step After the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the auxiliary game holding ball at 1222 and starts the variation of the auxiliary game pattern according to the determination, the CPUMC of the main control board M at step 1223 (third), The auxiliary game reserve number command (information relating to the reserve number on the auxiliary game side where the reserve balls have been digested, command to the side of the sub control board S) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1224. If the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1230 that the auxiliary gaming stop symbol is a hit symbol (“D1” or “D2”), then in step 1231-1 (third), the main control substrate The CPUMC of M determines whether or not the auxiliary game time short flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 1231-1 (third), at step 1231-2 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M is the auxiliary game stop symbol is a long open contact symbol {the contact symbol on the auxiliary game side is the first of the symbols 2 The opening period of the main game start opening electric character set B11d (may be one opening period which is the longest in the case of opening a plurality of times, or may be the total opening period) is relatively long (in particular, assistance It is a hit symbol when the short game flag is off, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is "D2". In the case of Yes in step 1231-2 (third), in step 1231-3 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the electric combination opening command (the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is open, And the command to the side of the sub control board S is set, and the process shifts to step 1232. If NO in step 1231-1 (third) or step 1231-2 (third), the process proceeds to step 1232. Note that the timing for setting the motorized part release command is not limited to this, and it may be set at a timing before the hit symbol on the auxiliary game side is stopped and displayed. As an example, it may be configured to be set at a predetermined time (for example, one second) before the timing of stopping and displaying the symbol during the symbol variation on the auxiliary game side. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to cause the player to shoot the game ball toward the second main game start opening electric role B11d prior to the opening timing of the second main game start opening electric role B11d, It is possible to provide a user-friendly game machine in consideration of the time from the shooting of the game ball to the arrival of the second main game start opening electric role B11d. In addition, after the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game start opening motorized part B11d in step 1244, the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1245 (third) is a command for closing the electrically operated product. (A command relating to information to the effect that the second main game start opening motorized combination B11d has been closed, and a command to the side of the sub control board S) is set, and the process shifts to step 1246. In addition, only when the open mode of the second main game start opening electric role B11d is a long-term (for example, an open mode in which it is 5 seconds and ball entry of the game ball is easy), the electric character open command is set It may be configured to Further, in consideration of the period of flowing down on the game board D35, the timing of transmission of the electric combination open command and the electric combination close command (that is, the first notification image is displayed as described later, or the first notification The second main game start-up electric accessory B11d may be configured to open and close a predetermined period (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) later than the timing at which the image is erased). By configuring in such a manner, after the game ball is fired toward the second main game start opening electric role object B11 d, the fired game ball reaches the second main game start opening electric position object B11 d The first notification image can be displayed in consideration of the period, and the player visually recognizes the first notification image, thereby firing the game ball toward the second main game start opening electric combination B11d, By the time the fired game ball reaches the second main game start opening electric combination B11d, it prevents the situation where a predetermined period has passed since the second main game start opening electric combination B11d starts opening. can do.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 of FIG. 4 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is steps 1314 (third) and 1334 (third), that is, in step 1312, the CPUMC of the main control board M is connected to the sub control board S side. (1) After setting the hold generation command of the main game content determination random number, in step 1314 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the first main game hold number command (the hold number on the first main game side is added It is information on the number of reservations on the first main game side to be set again, and the command to be transmitted to the side of the secondary control board S is set, and the process proceeds to step 1322. After the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the hold generation command of the second main game content determination random number to the secondary control board S in step 1332, the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1334 (third) Second main game hold number command (The information of the second main game side hold number which is set when the second main game side hold number is added, the command transmitted to the secondary control board S side) Is set, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1400).

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of a main gaming symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1), (2) of FIG. 8 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is step 1407 (third) and step 1408 (third), that is, in step 1406, the CPUMC of the main control board M reads the main gaming side random number read out. Is deleted from the hold information and the remaining hold information is shifted (hold reserve), then, in step 1408 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the hold number command related to the digested hold (sub control board It is a command to the S side, and is a first main game hold number command when the hold of the first main game side is digested, and a second main game when the hold of the second main game side is digested Set the number of pending commands) and move on to step 1410-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1407 (third), in other words, when the digested hold is the hold of the first main game side, step 1410 is carried out without performing the process of step 1408 (third). Move to -1.

  Next, the main game table 3 shown in FIG. 58 is an example of the first main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) according to the third embodiment. It is. The difference from the second embodiment is that the distribution of the fluctuation time is different according to the number of reservations that exist, particularly when the lottery result on the main game side is a loss. That is, when the number of reservations on the main game side is small, a relatively long fluctuation time is selected.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 31 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is steps 1627-1 (third) and 1627-2 (third). That is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the game state information command (command to the side of the sub control board S) related to the special game in step 1626, the main control is performed in step 1627-1 (third). The CPU MC of the substrate M determines whether or not the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) has received a notified number (in this example, nine) of winnings. That is, the predetermined number (the present number will be closed by reaching the number of winning prizes of 10 in the present example) by closing the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) by one subsequent winning. In the example, it is determined whether or not the number of notifications has been reached, with nine being the number of notifications. If Yes in step 1627-1 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M is a command immediately before closing {the command to the side of the sub-control board S in step 1627-2 (third), and the first 2) A command to the effect that the special winning opening C10 (C20) is about to be closed is set, and the process shifts to Step 1628 (second). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1627-1 (third), the process proceeds to step 1628 (second) without setting the command immediately before closing.

  By configuring as described above, the timing immediately before the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) closes on the main control board M side based on the determination whether the winning number has reached the predetermined number. A command to that effect can be sent to the sub control board side. The notification number is not limited to this example, and may be a value smaller than the predetermined number that is a condition for closing the special winning opening, or a value smaller than three. In addition, as a configuration that can determine the number of gaming balls flowing down on the game board D35, “the number of gaming balls on the board surface + the number of gaming balls that have already entered the big winning opening 所 定 predetermined condition that the big winning opening is closed When the requirement for “number (for example, 10)” is satisfied, the third notification image regarding the emission position is deleted from the effect display device SG, or the mode is switched (to be the second notification image) It is also good. In addition, the opening pattern of the special winning opening is not limited to this example (for example, when the opening end condition of the special winning opening is entry of one ball, etc., it becomes a condition to transmit the command just before closing simultaneously with opening. If you want to design a rendition for the purpose of making sure that you get the ball out (enter the ball), design so as not to send the command just before closing, and if it is difficult to expect an increase in the number of out balls, you close the remark The immediately preceding command may be transmitted, and the third notification image may be configured to be deleted / switched as appropriate.) Further, the command immediately before closing may be transmitted in accordance with the opening pattern (the value of the clock timer of opening time) according to the opening pattern. Specifically, a command immediately before closing may be transmitted immediately before closing the big winning opening (for example, 2 seconds before) based on the opening pattern, or immediately before closing due to winning into the big winning opening as described above. It may be configured to be used in combination with a command. In addition, in the situation where entry to the 9 big winning openings is decided (for example, gaming balls on the board + 9 playing balls that have already entered the big winning opening), "Aim for over winning! The notification image may be configured to display a notification image (a notification image suggesting the player to aim at entering a ball exceeding a predetermined number of entering balls under the condition that the big winning opening is closed), and such a configuration In such a case, an effect may be provided to bless the player if an over winning occurs. In the third embodiment, a command such as a command immediately before closing is transmitted from the main control board M to the sub control board S, and when the sub control board S receives the command, a notification image is generated based on the command. Although it is configured to execute display control, information for determining the type of the big hit received from the main control board M side (such as a big hit start demo command) and an effective entry command in each round (effective entry to the big winning opening) Based on the command sent when a ball is detected and the command sent when a valid ball entry is detected at the right general winning opening, the sub control board S enters the big winning opening etc. The determination according to the processing of the third embodiment may be executed to determine a command to be output to the sub-sub control board.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) of FIG. 46 in the third embodiment. First, the difference from the second embodiment is the step 2650 (third), that is, when there is a new entry into the first main game starting port A10 or the general winning opening P10, the step 2747-6. Or, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses CH different from BGM and other effect sound and outputs the sound of “right-handed!” From the speaker right D24R, or in step 2747-12 , And BGM and other production effect sound using a different CH, and after outputting a voice of "left-handed!" From the speaker left D24L, in step 2650 (third), the CPUSC of the sub control board S The game assist effect display control process to be performed is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second process)}.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of gaming assistance effect display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2650 (third) of FIG. 60 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2651, the CPUSC of the sub control board S may determine whether the current gaming state is the non-time shortening gaming state or not (the gaming state of the auxiliary gaming side is the non-time shortening gaming state or not). ) Is determined. In the case of Yes at step 2651, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines at step 2652 whether a command immediately before closing from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2652, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the second notification image in step 2654, and shifts to processing of step 2656. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2652, the process moves to step 2656. Next, in step 2656, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the motorized part release command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 2656, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the first notification image (right-handed) on the effect display device SG in step 2658 (the second notification image is continuously displayed) And the process of step 2660 is performed. On the other hand, if the result of the step 2656 is NO, the process goes to the step 2660. Next, at step 2660, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the motor operated combination object closing command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2660, in step 2662, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to erase the display of the first notification image (right-handed) (only the display of the second notification image), and The processing moves to processing {processing of step 2750 (second)}. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2660, the processing shifts to the next processing {processing of step 2750 (second processing)}.

  If No in step 2651, in other words, if the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, then in step 2668, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines the current second game based on the second main game hold number command. Check the main game hold number. Next, in step 2672, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the second main game holding number is equal to or less than a predetermined number (one in this example). If Yes in step 2672, in step 2674, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the first notification image (right-handed) on the effect display device SG, and performs the next process {step 2750 (second) Move to}. In the case of No at step 2672, in other words, when the second main game reservation number is two or more, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S erases the display of the first notification image (right-handed) at step 2676 The command is set, and the process proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 2750 (second processing)}. In this example, the first notification image (right-handed) is displayed when the second main game hold is equal to or less than a predetermined number (one in this example) in the time saving game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display the first notification image (right-handed) when the number of auxiliary game holdings is equal to or less than the specific number (for example, one) in the time saving gaming state. In addition, in the same figure, although it was comprised so that a 1st alerting picture might be displayed when the 2nd main game reservation is below a predetermined number in time reduction game state, the 2nd main game reservation is in time reduction game state. If the game property is such that the game property is significantly lost when it becomes 0 (if it is disadvantageous for the player if the big hit with the first main game symbol in the time reduction game state, etc.), the second It is preferable that the notification image displayed when the number of main game reservations is equal to or less than the predetermined number be a fifth notification image.

  By configuring as described above, (1) the second notification image of right or left hitting is erased immediately before the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) closes during execution of the special game , (2) The first notification image (right-handed) is displayed during the opening of the second main game start opening electric role B11d in the non-time shortening gaming state (at the time of auxiliary game short flag off) and the long opening 3) In the time saving game state, the time saving game is configured by displaying the first notification image (right-handed) when the number of second main game reservations is equal to or less than a predetermined number (one in this example). In the state, it is possible to assist the execution without interrupting the variation of the second main game symbol, it can be a user-friendly model. In addition, the 2nd main game reservation number used as a condition to display or erase the first notification image (right-handed) is not limited to this example, and may be 2, for example. It can be changed by the upper limit number of etc. Furthermore, although the first notification image (right-handed) is configured to be deleted when the second main game holding number exceeds the predetermined number, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first notification image (right-handed) The timing when it is useless to shoot the game ball to the player by changing to a more inconspicuous display etc. by changing to a more inconspicuous display such as black and white display or changing the position and size etc. It is good also as composition which indicates that it is (It is good also as the same composition also about the number of auxiliary game reservations).

  In addition, it is a requirement that the second main game holding number is a predetermined number (for example, two) or less or a requirement that the auxiliary game holding number is a predetermined number (for example, one) or less. The fifth notification image may be displayed. As the timing of the notification, notification may be made when the immediate requirement is satisfied, or the flag may be turned on when the requirement is satisfied, and notification may be made from the start of the next change. In addition, as the requirement to be erased, it may be configured to be erased after a predetermined time has elapsed or when the number of reservations becomes an upper limit. In the case where the fifth notification image is displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period of time and is deleted, for example, when the number of reservations on the main game side is 0 and the variation on the second main game side, or When the fluctuation is relatively long, such as when the fluctuation is on the game side, the period in which the fifth notification image is displayed is relatively long (for example, until the first stop timing of the decorative symbol) in the fluctuation with a relatively long fluctuation time. On the other hand, the fifth notification image may be erased in a relatively short period (e.g., 1.5 seconds to 3 seconds) during a short-term fluctuation. In particular, when the second main game side is configured to the player in an advantageous manner, the color of the fifth notification image relating to no effect or right-handed is changed in the losing change of the first main game side. It is also possible to provide a remarkable difference for making the fifth notification image conspicuous in the aspect of the fifth notification image at the time of fluctuation of the first main game side and at the time of fluctuation of the second main game side. In addition, in the case of super reach or the like, the fifth notification image may be deleted or, as a negative aspect, may be configured so as not to reduce the interest of the effect. In addition, as a configuration to display a notification image together with the display of reach etc., the degree of expectation of the special game (the size of the profit for the player, for example, transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of the special game) The configuration may be suggested by the difference in color for displaying the expectation), or may be configured to indicate the reliability as non-display when the reliability is high. In the case where the aspect is changed and suggested about such reliability, the second notification image or the fifth notification image is changed to a negative aspect (displayed small or displayed at a corner of the effect display device SG, etc.) For example, it is preferable to set it as an aspect with little influence on the interest of presentation. In the second embodiment, the display mode of the notification image is determined on the sub control substrate S side based on the information from the main control substrate M side, but on the main control substrate M side, the notification image is The display and the mode thereof may also be determined, and may be transmitted to the side of the sub control substrate S including the information.

  Further, in the game assistance effect display control process shown in FIG. 61, when the display of the first notification image is controlled based on the number of balls held for the auxiliary game as described above, the auxiliary game symbol and the main game are displayed. Since the game symbol can be changed at the same time, the change notification and the first notification of the main game symbol displayed at the timing immediately after the notification condition of the first notification image pertaining to the auxiliary game reserve number is satisfied It may not be appropriate to overlap and display an image (for example, during reach effect, at the time of main game symbol stop display, etc.). Therefore, the display of the first notification image accompanied by the number of balls for supporting the supplementary game only sets a flag when the notification start condition is established, and when the timing to notify appropriately comes (for example, when the next main game symbol changes start Etc.) is preferably controlled. In addition, after turning on the flag when controlling in this way, when the big hit is started due to the main game design which is fluctuating at that time, or during the reach production period and the remaining fluctuation period the number of auxiliary game holding balls number By controlling the flag so as to be turned off when the number of L exceeds a predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display of the first notification image at an inappropriate timing.

Fourth Embodiment
In the second embodiment, when the game ball enters a predetermined ball entry port such as the first main game start port or the general winning port, the appropriate game ball is not fired along with the progress of the game. When it is determined that the notification image is displayed, the notification image is displayed. However, such a configuration is not limited to the second embodiment. When it is determined that the game ball is not properly fired along with the progress of the game, the notification image is displayed, and a configuration different from the second embodiment is taken as the fourth embodiment, and the second embodiment is different from the second embodiment. Only the differences will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 31 in the fourth embodiment. The differences from the second embodiment are step 1627-3 (fourth), step 1627-4 (fourth), step 1633-1 (fourth), and step 1633-2 (fourth), that is, After the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a game state information command (command to the side of the sub control board S) related to the special game in step 1626, the main control board is selected in step 1627-3 (fourth). The CPUMC of M determines whether or not the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) has entered the ball. In the case of Yes in step 1627-3 (the fourth), in step 1627-4 (the fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the round ball number counter MP70c (the game ball having entered the large winning opening during the round) 1 is added to the counter value of the counter related to the number, and the process shifts to step 1628 (second). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1627-3 (fourth), the process shifts to step 1628 (second). In step 1632 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the first (second) large winning opening, and then in step 1633-1 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M A round ball entry number command (a command to the side of the sub control board S and a command relating to the number of gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening by the end of the round in each round) is set. Next, in step 1633-2 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the round ball number counter MP70c to zero, and proceeds to step 1634.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (fourth) of FIG. 46 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2748-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. If Yes in step 2748-1, in step 2748-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the second notification image on the effect display device SG, and the next process {step 2750 (second) Transition to the processing of If No in step 2748-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2748-3 whether or not a special game is being executed. In the case of Yes in step 2748-3, in step 2550 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a special game notification image display control process described later, and executes the following process {step 2750 (second) Transfer to processing}. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2748-3, the processing shifts to the next processing {processing of step 2750 (second processing)}.

  Next, FIG. 64 is a flowchart of special game notification image display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (fourth) of FIG. 63 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S confirms the opening mode of the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) in the special game based on the received launch instruction command. Next, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the first round is being executed. If Yes in step 2554, the process moves to step 2564. On the other hand, if No in step 2554, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the previous round is a long open round. If Yes in step 2556, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not this round is a long open round. If Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, the CPUSC of the sub control board S enters the first (second) big winning opening C10 (C20) in the previous round based on the received round entry number command. Check the number. Next, in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the number of balls entering the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) is less than or equal to a predetermined value (two balls in this example). judge. If Yes in step 2562, the process moves to step 2566. On the other hand, if No in step 2556, step 2558 or step 2562, the process moves to step 2564. Next, in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the second notification image on the effect display device SG, and shifts to the next processing {processing of step 2750 (second processing)}. Next, in step 2566, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the fifth notification image (right-handed) on the effect display device SG, and proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 2750 (second)}. Transition.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the special winning opening is opened by the long opening pattern in the round during execution of the special game, and the gaming ball is moved to the special winning opening. If the game balls of a predetermined number (three balls in this example) or more are not entered at the end of the round, even though the opening pattern can be entered easily), the command from the main control board M side Based on the fifth notification image (for example, an image for performing a relatively positive notification to the player as compared to the second notification image) is displayed to the player by firing the game ball to the proper launch position It will notify that it is possible to obtain a profit. That is, while the player is not aware that the player should play a right on the game during the special game, it is possible to prevent a remarkable decrease in the number of winning balls in the special game, and a user-friendly model can do.

  In the fifth notification image and the second notification image, it is assumed that the player is the fifth notification image (relatively positive display) and the second notification image (relatively negative display). It is not limited to these as long as it can be recognized. For example, the second notification image may be displayed in an area separately provided outside the effect display device SG. A configuration may be adopted in which display is not performed as the fifth notification image, and only effects by sound or light are added. Moreover, the number of ball pitches used as the conditions to perform the said alerting | reporting (warning) is not limited, You may comprise so that it may alert | report only when the ball is not a ball. In this example, when the big winning opening is opened continuously for two rounds continuously, the entry to the big winning opening in the previous round is determined, and the fifth notification image can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display the fifth notification image (the notification image according to a relatively positive aspect) when there is only entering the ball below the predetermined value in any long opening round. It may be configured to be displayed at the start of the first long open round thereafter. In addition, as the timing for deleting the fifth notification image, the display may be continued during the requirement-dependent long opening round, or in the long opening round, the predetermined value is exceeded (two in this example) large winning opening It may be configured to be erased when entering the ball, or may be configured to be erased with the lapse of a predetermined time. In this example, the display is performed as processing on the side of the sub control board S based on information from the main control board M side (for example, the count number of round ball count MP70c and the launch instruction command). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode, display timing, etc. may be determined by the processing on the main control board M side, and a command related to instruction display may be transmitted to the sub control board S side. . In the case where the display mode of the notification image in the next round is made different depending on the number of game balls entering the big winning opening in the previous round during the big hit, for example, to the big winning opening in the previous round When the fifth notification image is to be displayed in the next round when the number of ball entry is 3 or less, data relating to the number of ball entry in the previous round on the main control board M side ( For example, in the case of three spheres, the logical product of “00000011”) and mask data (for example, “11111100”) is calculated, and when the calculation result is 0, it is determined that the sphere is three spheres or less. The counter value related to the number of balls entering the big winning opening pertaining to the previous round may be equal to or less than a predetermined value on the side of the sub control board S, and may be configured for the next round. The firing instruction command according to the beginning when it receives from the main control board M side, may be configured capable of displaying a fifth notification image.

(Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, the configuration for warning (notifying) that the player should play the game by right-handing has been described in detail in order to prevent the player from being able to acquire a correct payout while the special game is being executed. The mode of notifying the player of the firing of the game ball in the special game being executed is not limited to this. Another example of such a notification mode will be described in detail as only a modification from the fourth embodiment as a first modification from the fourth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 65 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process according to the subroutine of the step (fourth) of FIG. 46 in the first modification of the fourth embodiment. The point of change from the fourth embodiment is step 2784-4 (fourth modification 1), that is, in step 2748-1 and step 2748-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is in the non-time-saving gaming state. And after it is determined that the special game is not being executed, the notification image changing flag (if it is on, the display mode of the second notification image may change) in step 2748-4 (fourth modification 1) Turn off the flag) and move on to the next processing {step 2750 (second)}.

  Next, FIG. 66 is a flowchart of special game notification image display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (fourth) of FIG. 65 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2568 (fourth change 1), steps 2570 (fourth change 1) to 2574 (fourth change 1), and steps 2578 (fourth change 1) to 2584. (The fourth variation 1), that is, in step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S opens the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) of the special game based on the received launch instruction command. After confirming the mode, in step 2568 (fourth modification), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the notification image changing flag has been turned off. In the case of Yes in step 2568 (fourth modification 1), the process moves to step 2554. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2568 (fourth modification 1), the processing shifts to step 2578 (fourth modification 1). In addition, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the number of ball entry to the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) in the previous round in step 2560 based on the received round ball entry number command, At step 2570 (fourth modification), the CPUSC of the sub control board S has a ball entry number to the first (second) large winning opening C10 (C20) equal to or greater than a predetermined value (11 spheres in this example) It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2570 (fourth modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the display mode of the second notification image being displayed in one step in step 2572 (fourth modification 1) (details are described) Set the command to be displayed (described later). Next, in step 2574 (fourth modification), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on a notification image changing flag, and shifts to the next processing {step 2750 (second)}.

  Next, in step 2578 (fourth modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current round is a long open round. In the case of Yes in step 2578 (fourth modification), the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the first (second) in the previous round based on the received round entry number command in step 2580 (fourth modification). ) Check the number of ball entry to the big winning opening. Next, in step 2582 (fourth change 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the number of balls to the first (second) large winning opening to a predetermined value (the large winning opening is closed) The number of ball entry exceeding the number, in other words, the number of ball entry where over winning will occur, is determined whether or not 11 balls or more in this example. If Yes in step 2582 (fourth modification), the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the display mode of the second notification image being displayed in one step in step 2584 (fourth modification) and displays the command Is set, and the process proceeds to the next process {step 2750 (second)}. Also in the case of No in step 2578 (fourth modification) or step 2582 (fourth modification), the process proceeds to the next processing {step 2750 (second)}.

  Next, the table in the upper part of the figure is a table showing an example of transition of the display mode of the second notification image. As shown in the figure, the second notification image is displayed in the display mode without characters as shown in the upper part of the notification image display image shown in the upper right of the figure as a stage 1 during execution of the special game. . In the second stage of the above-mentioned "one-step change" mode, one character (in this example, one character) is configured to be displayed together with the second notification image as shown at the bottom of the display image of the notification image. ing. Furthermore, from stage 3 to stage 5, the characters displayed with the second notification image increase one by one. If the display mode of the second notification image is four characters (that is, step 5) in step 2584 (fourth modification 1), the configuration of the second notification image is configured so as not to be changed any more. ing. By configuring as described above, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the notification image in this example is limited to a mode of giving a notification (warning) to the player when a proper game is not executed. Instead, the player is a technical intervention (for example, a method of technical intervention also referred to as “over winning”, and the special winning opening is closed by adjusting the firing intensity of the gaming ball while the special game is being performed. The game balls that have exceeded the predetermined number will be entered, etc., so that if it is successful to obtain relatively many balls out during the special game, it is possible to execute an effect to bless the player It can be configured to have a player satisfaction.

  Note that the aspect of the second notification image is not limited to this example, and the color or gradation of the second notification image may be changed, or the character may be changed as the level goes up, or a stepwise effect effect (for example, , Color can be changed, or the effect of glittering around the second notification image can be performed. In addition, the notification image is that the next open is a long open round on the condition that there has been more than a predetermined value in the previous round (in this example, 11 or more) and that this is a long open round. In the present embodiment, the second notification image is changed stepwise. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the display mode of the second notification image may be changed when there is a ball entry above a predetermined value, that is, an "over winning". As a step change, it may be continuously displayed how many times the "over win" has been successful until the final round. Further, the timing of changing the display may be at the time of detecting the "over winning". In addition, when all “successful over winning” is successful in the long open round, a separate effect (“congratulation!” Or a bless by voice) may be provided. The present invention is not limited to the case where the "over winning" is successful, and the second notification image may be changed stepwise when the round ends with entering a specified number of balls or less. In addition, when “over winning” occurs, it can also be applied as an effect of suggesting in advance whether or not there is a suspension to be a big hit in the suspension of the second main game to be digested after the end of the special game. For example, each time an "over winning" occurs in each long opening round, whether or not there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold related to the second main game, a big hit symbol when a big hit, a big hit effect being executed, etc. In order to perform a lottery whether to increase the number of characters (increase one or more people) by using a different lottery table according to the information of, the hold that will be a big hit in the hold related to the second main game is It may be made to raise an expectation to a certain thing (it is determined that a big hit exists in the hold when reaching the final stage).

Fifth Embodiment
In the second to fourth embodiments, based on the command (information) from the main control board M side, it is configured to display an alerting, warning, and blessing image related to the game progress, but the game progress to the player It is not limited to this as a mode which reports about. Furthermore, in addition to the information from the main control board M side, as a process of the sub control board S side particularly in the standby state, an example of notifying the player of the progress of the game will be described below as the fifth embodiment. Only the differences between the two embodiments will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 67 is a main flowchart of the sub control substrate S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the fifth embodiment. The difference with the second embodiment is the step 2450 (fifth), that is, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a waiting demo display control process described later in the step 2450 (fifth), It transfers to step 2100.

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of standby demonstration display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fifth) of FIG. 67 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a game has not been executed for a predetermined period (for example, 180 seconds) or more. Here, it is determined whether or not the game is being executed, various entering detection commands from the main control board M side {auxiliary game start entry entry detection command, first (second) main game starting entry Detection of a sphere detection command, a general winning opening entrance detection command, etc.}, or detection of an operation of the launch handle D44 (level data transmitted from the main control board M related to the handle touch situation is continuous in a detection period of a predetermined period It is judged about the existence of execution of a game by (when it is on information). If Yes in step 2452, in step 2454, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the standby demonstration flag is off. If Yes in step 2454, in steps 2456 and 2458, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display the standby demo display and sets a command to display the standby demo background. The standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background are configured to be displayed in front of the first notification image and the second notification image. That is, for example, in a situation where the second notification image is displayed during the time saving gaming state, when the game is not executed for a predetermined period (180 seconds in this example), the waiting demonstration display and the waiting demonstration By displaying the background, the second notification image can not be viewed. Next, in step 2459, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts a standby demonstration timer MP90t {a timer related to a standby demonstration display (background) and an increment timer}. Next, in step 2460, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the standby demonstration flag and shifts to step 2470. On the other hand, if the result of step 2454 is No, the process moves to step 2470. If No in step 2452, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the standby demo display and sets a command for erasing the display of the standby demo background in steps 2462 and 2464. . Next, in step 2466, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets the standby demonstration timer MP90t (increment timer). Next, in step 2468, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the standby demonstration flag and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  Next, in step 2470, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby demo timer MP 90t has reached the mode change value (30 seconds in this example). If Yes in step 2470, in step 2472 the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the standby demonstration background, and the process shifts to processing of step 2474. Also in the case of No at step 2470, the process proceeds to step 2474. Next, in step 2474, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the timer value of the standby demo timer MP90t has reached the circulation value (for example, 60 seconds). If Yes in step 2474, in step 2476, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the standby demo background. Next, in step 2478, the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets and starts the timer value of the standby demonstration timer MP90t (increment timer), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2100). Also in the case of No at step 2474, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2100).

  By configuring as described above, a command (information) from the main control board M side and / or the processing on the sub control board S side related to the execution of the game allows the game to be performed for a predetermined period (180 seconds in this example) In the case where execution is not performed, display of a stand-by demonstration display (background) can be performed. Furthermore, when the game is not executed, the standby demonstration display is continuously displayed, while the standby demonstration background is executed intermittently (30 seconds every 30 seconds in this example). Although the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background are configured to be displayed in front of the first notification image and the second notification image, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be configured to simultaneously display in the same layer Alternatively, only the second notification image may be displayed in front of the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background. In addition, the second effect display device may be provided to be able to display in different areas.

  Next, FIG. 69 is an example of a waiting demo image in the fifth embodiment. First, from the left in the upper part of the figure, in the time-saving game state, the second notification image (in the upper end of the effect display device SG, the character of "→ please hit right →") is displayed, a decorative symbol Fluctuation stops and the lost symbol stops. Next, by continuing the state in which the game is not executed for 180 seconds, the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background are displayed in the upper center of the figure, and the display of the decorative symbol and the second notification image become invisible. . Furthermore, when 30 seconds pass without execution of the game, the stand-by demonstration background is erased, and the display of the decorative symbol and the second notification image become visible. In addition, the stand-by demonstration display is displayed simultaneously on the front of the decorative symbol. Next, when 30 seconds pass without further execution of the game, the stand-by demonstration background is again displayed over the entire area of the effect display device SG, and the display of the decorative symbol and the second notification image can not be visually recognized. Become. Next, when the launch handle D44 is operated by the player, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S receives a detection signal from the launch handle D44, and it is determined that the game has been executed, and the standby demo display and standby demo background The display is erased, and the display of the decorative symbol and the second notification image become visible.

  By configuring as described above, in the fifth embodiment, when there is no execution of the game for a predetermined period, it is configured to be able to display that the player is on standby, and the mode is changed periodically. It can be configured to be able to recognize the current gaming state and the like. Also, by configuring the standby demo display and the standby demo background to be lower than the display priority of the notification image, the standby demo display and the standby demo background displayed by determining that the game is not progressing In other words, by configuring the notification image not to be displayed during the stand-by demonstration, it is possible to prevent the situation of the game from being grasped even though the player is not playing, and to reduce the data capacity. It will also be possible. Incidentally, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of a configuration that is relatively advantageous to the player in the time reduction gaming state, the standby demonstration display and the display of the standby demonstration background are executed only during the time reduction gaming state. It may be obtained, or the aspect may be configured to be different between the time-saving gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state (in the non-time-saving gaming characters, the standby demo background is a part of display etc And negative notification image etc.). In addition, it is preferable to continue the notification such as the launch instruction display unit HS and the notification of the classified by the utility, and the demonstration display and the background of the demonstration are not periodically deleted, but the standby demonstration display and the standby The demonstration background is continuously displayed, and the display priority of the decoration pattern and the second notification image is raised (it may be displayed on the entire surface of the standby demonstration display. In addition, the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background (animation etc.) As a routine in which the execution is repeated, a period may be separately provided to display the gaming state at the game stop (for example, a decorative symbol or the second notification image) within that period, or the game state at the game stop ( For example, a separate timer may be provided to display the decorative symbol and the second notification image), and a standby time may be provided until the standby demo background and the standby demo display routine are redisplayed. As a configuration for detecting the operation of the handle D44, it is assumed that only information on information (Yes or No) on whether or not the launch handle D44 has been operated is transmitted from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side. It is preferable not to transmit the information (e.g., the emission intensity) of the strike according to the operation of D44, and the notification content regarding the strike is preferably processed (generally judged) on the side of the sub control board S. If the main control board M side changes the flag relating to the strike, the strike information is transmitted based on the handle touch, and if the launch position is notified immediately, the player is determined to be a big hit. A situation that is perceived in advance (for example, in a gaming machine related to parallel lottery, the second main gaming symbol is stopped and displayed at a timing during the change of the first main gaming symbol Therefore, when the game state shifts from the time saving game state to the non-time shortening game state, the handle is switched first during the change in the gaming machine performing the game state transition when the display changes from right to left This is because it is assumed that the game state transition may be inferred on the basis of the notification of the recommended launch position based on the sorting information transmitted by retouching. The notification image displayed when there is an event may be deleted by displaying for a predetermined time, and the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background may be displayed during the time reduction gaming state, and the notification image may be displayed by the operation of the firing handle D44. In the case of a standby demo display or a standby demo background, an alert may be issued (in particular, a warning may be output). When the requirement of notification is satisfied, the first notification display may be performed. When the notification image is displayed by operating the discharge handle D44, the display of the notification image may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed. For example, in the case where the notification image is deleted after 5 seconds from the operation of the discharge handle D44, even if the discharge handle D44 is operated again 3 seconds after the notification image is displayed, the first discharge handle D44 The notification image may be deleted after 5 seconds from the operation of. With such a configuration, the display will not continue to be displayed more than necessary, and will not be continued to display more than necessary even if the player unexpectedly releases the firing handle D44.

Sixth Embodiment
In the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, the aspect for prompting the player to operate the gaming machine appropriately for proper progression of the game has been described in detail, but the invention is not limited thereto. In particular, with regard to the indication of right-handed and left-handed instructions, it is determined on the side of the sub control board S whether or not the instruction image being executed is correct. As the sixth embodiment, hereinafter, only differences from the first modification from the second embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) of FIG. 46 in the sixth embodiment. The difference between the second embodiment and the first modification is that steps 2747-1 (sixth), steps 2747-2 (sixth), steps 2748-1 (sixth), and steps 2350 (sixth). That is, in step 2747-1 (sixth), the CPUSC of the secondary control board S confirms the game state. Next, in step 2747-2 (sixth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a time saving game state or a special game is being executed. If Yes in step 2747-2 (sixth), control is passed to step 2747-3. On the other hand, if the result of the step 2747-2 (sixth) is No, the process moves to a step 2250 (second variable 1). After the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to be displayed on the fourth notification image in step 2747-8, step 2747-9, or step 2747-13, in step 2748-1 (sixth), The CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores, in the RAM area of the CPUSC of the subcontrol board S, information on whether the various notification images instruct a left or a right. Next, in step 2350 (sixth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a notification image confirmation process described later, and shifts to the next process {process of step 2750 (second process)}.

  Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of notification image confirmation processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 (sixth) of FIG. 70 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the received launch instruction command and confirms whether the command is a command related to right strike or a command pertaining to left strike. Next, at step 2353, the CPUSC of the sub control board S relates to whether the various notification images temporarily stored in the RAM area of the CPUSC of the sub control board S indicate left strike or right strike. Confirm the information. Next, in step 2354, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the information related to the confirmed various notification images is information related to left strike. If Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the firing instruction command is a command related to left hitting. If Yes in step 2356, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the display of the first notification image, and displays the second notification image and the fourth notification image in a display mode related to right-handling, Transfer to next processing {processing of step 2750 (second processing)}. On the other hand, if No in step 2354, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the launch instruction command is not a command related to right strike. If Yes in step 2360, in step 2362 the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the display of the first notification image and displays the second notification image and the fourth notification image in a display mode according to left-handling, Transfer to next processing {processing of step 2750 (second processing)}. In the case where the second notification image is configured as “non-display = an indication to the left” in step 2362, the second notification image may be configured not to be displayed. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2356 or step 2360, the processing shifts to the next processing {processing of step 2750 (second processing)}.

  By configuring as described above, information received from the main control board M side (a command related to right strike or a command related to left strike) and information temporarily stored on the sub control board S side (right strike instruction Information on whether or not the information on whether it is instructed to hit the left does not match {the information (command) on the right strike or the information (command) on the left strike does not match} In this case, the first notification image is erased based on a command from the main control board M side, and a display mode according to right-handling → left-handling according to the second notification image and the fourth notification image, It is possible to make a display that has been changed from the display mode according to left hitting to the display mode according to right hitting. As described above, it is possible to appropriately correct the erroneous launch position so as not to cause the disadvantage of the player, and the user-friendly gaming machine can be provided. In addition, the first notification image is configured to be immediately erased if the information (command) relating to right strike or the information (command) pertaining to left strike does not match. By this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from continuously notifying the player of erroneous information with respect to the gaming state on the main gaming side. In this example, immediate correction is performed based on an instruction from the main control board M. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and all notification images being displayed may be erased (is transmitted next time) Redisplay based on new command etc.) In addition, it is preferable to provide a dedicated buffer relating to instruction display on the side of the sub control substrate S, and to refer to it at a necessary timing when displaying a notification image. As described above, for the first notification image, when the command from the main control substrate M side and the content regarding the firing instruction do not match, the display on the sub control substrate S side is erased, while the second notification image and the second notification image For the 4 notification images, when the command from the main control board M side and the content regarding the firing instruction do not match, based on the command received from the main control board M side (based on the gaming state of the main control board M side ) The display on the side of the sub control board S is corrected immediately for notification. Based on the notification image for erasing the display on the sub control substrate S side and the command received from the main control substrate M side when the command from the main control substrate M side and the content regarding the firing instruction do not match (main control substrate The combination with the notification image to be notified immediately after correcting the display on the secondary control board S side based on the gaming state on the M side is not limited to this example, and there is no problem even if it is appropriately changed. If the first notification image and the second notification image, which are notification images that are relatively noticeable (the display area is large) when viewed from the player, do not match the content of the command from the main control board M side and the firing instruction The fourth notification image, which is a notification image that is relatively inconspicuous (small display area) as seen from the player, is a command from the main control substrate M side. If the content about the launch instruction does not match, the display on the secondary control board S side is immediately corrected based on the command received from the main control board M side (based on the gaming state on the main control board M side) It may be configured to be a notification image to be notified. In this way, unlike the configuration in which the second notification image is switched based on the firing instruction command as shown in FIG. It will be possible to shift from the timing of the game state transition on the M side.

Further, the transmission of the command from the main control board M can be configured as follows.
(1) A flag relating to separation that changes in accordance with the gaming state (time shortening gaming state, probability fluctuation gaming state, special game being executed, etc.) is provided, and a command according to the flag is transmitted to the secondary control board S side .
(2) At timing when there is a possibility that the flag related to the strike may change, transmission is performed each time even if there is no actual change.
(3) The above-mentioned timings are "when the power is restored,""when the lost symbol is stopped", "when the special game is started", "when the big winning opening is open", "when the big winning opening is closed", "the special gaming At the end of
(4) The flag concerning the said distinction is also output to an external terminal (for example, test terminal).

Seventh Embodiment
In the first modification from the second embodiment, regarding the position where the player shoots the game ball, the ball entering the game ball at the improper launch position is confirmed within a predetermined period of time after entering the ball. While the notification image is displayed and the notification by sound can be executed each time when is continuously confirmed, the configuration of the notification (warning) is not limited to this. About the composition which can continue informing (continuation) until a mode which should be informing (warning) is canceled or for a predetermined period, about difference with modification 1 from a 2nd embodiment below as a 7th embodiment Only detailed.

  First, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of right-handed image display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 (second modification 1) of FIG. 51 in the seventh embodiment. The difference from the first modification from the second embodiment is step 2167 (seventh), step 2168 (seventh), and step 2173 (seventh) to step 2182 (seventh), that is, step 2167. In (the seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S is turned on when the right hitting warning is in progress (when a predetermined number of balls is detected in the first main game start opening A10 in a situation where the right hitting is to be performed) It is determined whether or not the flag) is off. In the case of Yes in step 2167 (the seventh), the process proceeds to step 2152, and in the case of No in step 2167 (the seventh), the process proceeds to step 2176 (the seventh). If it is determined in step 2164 that the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the counter value of the first starting opening ball percentage counter MP61c is greater than or equal to the notification value (two), then in step 2168 (seventh) The CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the fifth notification image (right-handed) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses CH different from the BGM and the other effect sound, and outputs a sound of "right-handed!" From the speaker right D24R. Next, in step 2173 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the right-turn warning executing flag. In step 2174 (the seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets the first starting opening confirmation timer MP21t, and proceeds to step 2171. If No in step 2167 (the seventh), in other words, if the right-turn warning under execution flag is on, in step 2176 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the right-turn warning end condition Is determined whether or not

Here, with the right-handed warning end condition, for example, (1) when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the fifth notification image and voice output timing, (2) from the main control board M side to the right of the game board Receive passing information (general winning opening entrance ball detection command, big winning opening entrance ball detecting command, second starting opening entrance ball detecting command, auxiliary game starting opening entrance ball detecting command, etc.) of sensors provided in the structure to be arranged When or when the game ball is detected by the effect control sensor on the right side of the board, or (3) occurrence of the jackpot, main control board accompanying the game state change such as the occurrence of time shortening gaming state · probability fluctuation gaming state When the launch instruction command related to the right strike is received from the M side, the above condition is satisfied. If YES in step 2176 (seventh step), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to delete the display of the fifth notification image (right-handed) in step 2178 (seventh step). Next, in step 2180 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the output of the voice “right-handed!” From the speaker right D24R. Next, at step 2182 (seventh step), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the right-turn warning executing flag, and shifts to the next processing (processing at step 2747-7). The following conditions may be used as the right-hand warning end condition.
(A) The time when symbol variation ends at the time when notification by the fifth notification image (right-handed) is started, or may be when the next variation is started.
(B) After the notification by the fifth notification image (right-handed) is started, a specific effect (super reach with high expectation of big hit, high expectation notice effect before reaching, pseudo continuous variation is executed during symbol variation) When the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol in the symbol variation occurs (C) Power failure return (D) after symbol variation of specified number of times (for example, start the notification or N variation (N is an integer) At the start or stop of N. N is the total number of changes in the first main game or second main game)
In addition, although the above timing was made into the right-handed warning end condition which ends right-handed warning image display (the 5th informing image), with the display of the right-handed image warning, with a sound or a lamp member of gaming machine frame When the warning display is performed at the same time, a warning regarding the recommended recommended shooting position may be given by voice etc., not in synchronization with the end of the image. In addition, for a plurality of changes immediately after the game state transition, for example, it may be configured to notify even in the case of any of the first main game hold or the second main game hold to be preferentially digested.

  Next, the lower part of the same drawing is an example of a display image diagram of a notification image of the fifth notification image (right-handed) and the fifth notification image (left-handed). In the fifth notification image (right-handed), a right-pointing arrow (an oblique striped texture is attached) with the word “right-handed” is displayed on the entire screen of the effect display device SG It is an aspect. In the fifth notification image (left-handed), a left-pointing arrow (with a diagonal striped texture attached) with the word "left-handed" is displayed over the entire screen of the effect display device SG It is an aspect that Note that the display mode is not limited to these, and it may be any mode as long as the player can be clearly notified of a right-handed or left-handed instruction.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of left-turning image display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second modification 1) of FIG. 51 in the seventh embodiment. The difference from the first modification from the second embodiment is step 2267 (seventh), step 2268 (seventh), and step 2273 (seventh) to step 2282 (seventh), that is, step At 2267 (the seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the left-turn warning in-progress flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2267 (the seventh), the process proceeds to step 2252, and in the case of No in step 2267 (the seventh), the process proceeds to step 2276 (the seventh). If it is determined in step 2264 that the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the counter value of the general winning opening ball percentage counter MP62c is greater than or equal to the notification value (two), step 2268 (seventh) The CPUSC of the control board S sets a command for displaying the fifth notification image (left-handed) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2270, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses CH different from the BGM and the other effect sound, and outputs a sound of “left-handed!” From the speaker left D24L. Next, in step 2273 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the left-turning warning executing flag. At step 2274 (seventh step), the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets the general winning opening confirmation timer MP22t, and proceeds to step 2271. If No in step 2267 (seventh), in other words, if the left-turn warning in-progress flag is on, then in step 2276 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs the left-turn warning termination condition Is determined whether or not

  Here, the left-turn warning end condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the fifth notification image (left-handed) and the voice output timing, (2) from the main control board M side Detection information in the structure placed on the left side of the game board (1st main game start opening entrance ball detection command, left side general winning opening entrance ball detection command (when the game board on the left side has a general winning opening), left side When receiving an auxiliary game start slot entrance detection command (in the case where an auxiliary game start port is provided on the left side of the game board) or the like, or (3) Big hit game · Small hit game end (time after end game) It will be satisfied by any of the following cases: receiving a launch instruction command pertaining to leftward from the main control board M side such as termination of time shortening gaming state / probability fluctuation gaming state, etc.) . If YES in step 2276 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the fifth notification image (left-handed) in step 2278 (seventh). Next, in step 2280 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the output of the sound “left-handed!” From the speaker right D24R. Next, in step 2282 (seventh), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the left-turn warning in progress flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2747-13). Also in the case of No at step 2276 (seventh), the process proceeds to the next process (the process at step 2747-13).

  By configuring as described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the player continuously detects the launch of the game ball to an inappropriate launch position during the progress of the game, the game is played at the normal launch position. It is configured to continue to execute a display indicating the correct launch position until the ball is in a state of being fired, or for a predetermined period.

  It should be noted that the fifth notification image is inconspicuous (it is displayed in a small corner of the effect display device SG, etc.) after a relatively short time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed since the notification (display) is started. It is desirable for the aspect to change stepwise so as to be erased after a relatively long period of time (e.g., 15 to 30 seconds) after being changed to). The same applies to voice, and it can be configured to be accompanied by voice notification only for the first short period (2 to 3 seconds). When configured in this manner, if the variation time of the decorative symbol is a shortening variation (for example, 3 seconds), the fifth notification image is displayed redundantly when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the stop The fifth notification image may be forcibly erased at the first short period (2 to 3 seconds) after the symbol becomes invisible. Moreover, as processing in the case of such a shortening change, the fifth notification image may be continuously displayed over the next change (for example, in the change in the number of holdings 4, the fifth notification image is When it is displayed, the display is to be performed in two times in advance, or the right-hand warning in-progress flag is kept on, or the timer for counting the end condition is temporarily not displayed on the fifth notification image Do not update in period, etc.).

  In the seventh embodiment, as a condition for executing the display of the notification (warning), the display of the notification (warning) can be executed when the launch of the gaming ball to an inappropriate launch position is continuously detected. However, the conditions for executing the notification (warning) display are not limited to this. Warn (notice) against firing of the game ball to an inappropriate launch position at the transition time from right hitting to left hitting or left hitting to right hitting, such as transition of gaming state or execution of special game As a first modification of the seventh embodiment, only the changes from the seventh embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. 31 in the first modification from the seventh embodiment. The changes from the seventh embodiment are steps 1648-1 (seventh change 1) and 1648-2 (seventh change 1), that is, in step 1626, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is in a special game. After setting the game state information command (command to the side of the sub control board S) related to the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 1648-1 (seventh change 1), the first (second) large winning opening It is determined whether or not entry into C10 (C20) has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 1648-1 (seventh change 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S generates a special winning entry ball detection command {first (second) large in step 1648-2 (seventh change 1) This is a command related to entering the winning opening C10 (C20), and the command to the side of the sub control board S is set, and the process shifts to step 1628 (second). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1648-1 (seventh modification 1), the process shifts to step 1628 (second). By configuring as described above, it is possible to transmit information (command) to the side of the sub control board S to the effect that there is a ball entry to the special winning opening during special game execution.

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second) of FIG. 46 in the first modification from the seventh embodiment. The changes from the seventh embodiment are step 2747-3 (seventh change 1), step 2850 (seventh change 1), step 2748-5 (seventh change 1), and step 2900 (seventh change 1). In other words, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2747-2 that the launch instruction command relates to right-handed content, the sub control board S is selected in step 2747-3 (seventh variation 1). The CPUSC sets the command to display the second notification image (right-handed) on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2850 (seventh modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes right-turn warning display control processing described later, and shifts to step 2747-7. Also, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2747-2 that the launch instruction command relates to left-handed content, in step 2785-5 (seventh modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S , A command to display the second notification image (left hit) on the effect display device SG is set. Next, in step 2900 (seventh modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a left hit warning display control process to be described later, and shifts to step 2747-13.

  Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of right-turn warning display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2850 (seventh modification 1) of FIG. 75 in the first modification from the seventh embodiment. First, in step 2852, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the right-turn warning in-progress flag is off. If Yes in step 2852, it is determined in step 2854 whether the right-turn monitoring flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 2854, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines at step 2856 whether or not the notification image segment timing has been reached. Here, with the notification image segment timing, (1) the second notification image (left hit) is displayed in the non-time shortening gaming state, (2) the second notification image (in the time shortening gaming state Right-handed) is displayed. (3) During the special game, the second notification image (right-handed) is displayed, and it is the timing at which mutually transitioned between the situations. If Yes in step 2856, in step 2858, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t (a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the notification image segment timing transitioning to right-handed, increment timer). Do. Next, in step 2860, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on a right-turning monitoring flag (a flag that is turned on during a period monitoring whether a right-turning is being executed), and proceeds to step 2862. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2854, the process proceeds to step 2862. In the case of No at step 2856, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2747-7).

  Next, in step 2862, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving gaming state. If YES in step 2862, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2864 whether a general winning entry entrance detection command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 2864, in step 2866, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t (increment timer) and clears it to zero. Next, in step 2868, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the right-on monitoring flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2747-7). If No in step 2864, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2870 whether the timer value of the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t has reached a predetermined value (30 seconds in this example). . If YES in step 2870, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the fifth notification image (right-handed) on the effect display device SG in step 2872. Next, in step 2874, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses a channel different from the BGM and the other effect sound, and outputs an audio of “right-handed!” From the right speaker D24R. Next, in steps 2875 and 2876, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the right-on monitoring flag and turns on the right-on warning executing flag. Next, in step 2878, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2747-7). Also in the case of No at step 2870, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2747-7).

  On the other hand, if the result of step 2862 is No, that is, if the special game is being executed, the CPUSC of the sub control board S detects the special winning opening ball detection command from the main control board M side {step 1) Second) It is determined whether or not a command relating to information to the effect that the entry into the special winning opening C10 (C20) has been detected is received. If Yes in step 2882, in step 2884, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the right-handed monitoring timer MP81t (increment timer) and clears it to zero. Next, in step 2886, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the right-turning monitoring flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2747-7). On the other hand, if No in step 2882, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines in step 2880 whether or not the start timing of the second round in the special game has been reached. If Yes in step 2880, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2747-7). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2880, that is, when the start timing of the second round is reached and the big winning opening entrance detection command from the main control board M side is not received, step 2872-step. By executing the process of 2878, the display of the fifth notification image (right-handed) and the output to the right speaker D24R in the effect display device SG and the like are executed according to the right-handed instruction, and the next process Move to step 7).

  On the other hand, if the result of step 2852 is No, that is, if the right-turn warning under execution flag is on, then it is determined in step 2888 whether the right-turn warning end condition is satisfied. Here, the right-turn warning end condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the fifth notification image and voice output timing, (2) general winning opening is entered from the main control board M side This is satisfied by either the case of receiving the sphere detection command or (3) the case of receiving a launch instruction command related to right-handed driving from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2888, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the fifth notification image (right-handed) in step 2890, and with "right-handed!" From the speaker right D24R. Stop audio output. Next, in step 2894, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the right-turn warning executing flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2747-7). Also in the case of No in step 2888, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2747-7). In addition, since it is the same as that of the example 1 of a change from 2nd Embodiment about the display image figure of the 5th alerting | reporting image of the lower stage of the figure, description is omitted here.

  Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of left hit warning display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2900 (seventh modification 1) of FIG. 75 in the first modification from the seventh embodiment. First, in step 2902, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the left-turn warning in-progress flag is off. If Yes in step 2902, it is determined in step 2904 whether the left-turning monitoring flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2904, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2906 whether or not the notification image separation timing has been reached. Here, with the notification image segment timing, (1) the second notification image (left hit) is displayed in the non-time shortening gaming state, (2) the second notification image (in the time shortening gaming state Right-handed) is displayed. (3) During the special game, the second notification image (right-handed) is displayed, and it is the timing at which mutually transitioned between the situations. In the case of Yes in step 2906, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the left hitting monitoring timer MP 82t (a timer for measuring the elapsed time from the notification image division timing transitioning to the left hitting, increment timer) in step 2908 Do. Next, in step 2910, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on a left-turning monitoring flag (a flag that is turned on during a period monitoring whether left-turning is being executed), and proceeds to step 2912. Transition. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2904, the process proceeds to step 2912. In the case of No at step 2906, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2747-13).

  Next, in step 2912, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the first main game start opening ball insertion detection command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 2912, in step 2914, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the left-handed monitoring timer MP 82t (increment timer) and clears it to zero. Next, in step 2916, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the left-turning monitoring flag, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2747-13). If NO in step 2912, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2918 whether the timer value of the left hitting monitoring timer MP 82t has reached a predetermined value (300 seconds in this example). . In the case of Yes in step 2918, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the fifth notification image (left hit) on the effect display device SG in step 2920. Next, in step 2922, the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses CH different from the BGM and the other effect sound, and outputs a voice of “left-handed!” From the speaker left D24L. Next, in step 2924 and step 2926, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the left hitting monitoring flag and turns on the left hitting warning on flag. Next, in step 2928, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets the left-handed monitoring timer MP 82t, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2747-13). Also in the case of No in step 2918, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2747-13).

  On the other hand, if the result of step 2902 is No, that is, if the left-turn warning in-progress flag is on, it is determined in step 2929 whether the left-turn warning end condition is satisfied. Here, the left-turn warning end condition is, for example, (1) when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the timing of outputting the fifth notification image and the sound, (2) This is satisfied by either the case where the ball entry detection command is received or (3) the case where the launch instruction command related to the left strike is received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes at step 2929, at step 2930, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the fifth notification image (left hit). Next, in step 2932, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops the output of the voice “left strike!” From the speaker left D24L. Next, in step 2934, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the left-turn warning executing flag, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2747-13). Also in the case of No at step 2929, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 2747-13). In addition, since it is the same as that of the example 1 of a change from 2nd Embodiment about the display image figure of the 5th alerting | reporting image of the lower stage of the figure, description is omitted here.

  By configuring as described above, in the first modification from the seventh embodiment, with regard to the position at which the player shoots the game ball, the state where the player should hit right → the state where he should hit left or left hit If it is detected that the player has not fired the game ball to the correct launch position corresponding to the post-transition state within a predetermined period of time after transitioning from a state where it should be to a state where it should hit right, Active firing instruction display and audio warning on the display device SG can be confirmed that the gaming ball is fired at the correct firing position, or can be continuously executed until a predetermined period has elapsed. . In addition, the display mode in the effect display device and the mode of the warning by sound are not limited to them as long as they actively notify the player. For example, the warning may be issued by blinking the game effect lamp D26. A warning may be notified by stimulating the player's five senses by the operation of the effect members provided in the gaming machine frame, such as vibrating the firing handle D44 and the sub input button.

  In addition, during the special game, if the predetermined value related to the right-handed termination condition is long enough to span the next round, the display instruction of the notification image based on the launch instruction command of the next round start is ignored In this case, the display of the notification image related to the warning (notification) may be prioritized. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reliably notify the player that proper launch has not been performed in the recommended gaming state. On the other hand, the predetermined value relating to the right-handed ending condition is set to be shorter than the period for executing one round, or the configuration is such that a launch instruction command is transmitted to the secondary control board S side together with the special winning opening closing command. The display of the notification image according to the warning (notification) may be ended in response to the reception of the release instruction command together with the closing of the mouth. By configuring in this manner, the launch instruction may not be displayed when the round to be performed next to the round in which the warning display is performed is a short open. In the case of a big hit, there is a case where a series of effect display is performed mainly in an early round game such as the big hit start demonstration and the first round in the big hit. At this time, display of emission position information and information on effects during demonstration or effect during a demonstration are transmitted from the sub main substrate performing effect control at the start of the big hit demonstration or at the start of each round to the sub sub substrate performing image control. The sub-sub board that performs image control has a configuration that ignores the information on demonstration-in-progress and information on effects in round if it is the same information as the information received last time (does not re-set the presentation); If there is no change, it will be ignored. Note that even if the information related to the effect is common as the information received from the sub main board, the display mode of the emission position information is changed if the information related to the display of the emission position information is different.

Eighth Embodiment
In the fifth embodiment, in the stand-by demonstration display, display of a stand-by demonstration background (which may be animation or may be displayed with priority over the entire effect display device SG) and a stand-by demonstration display (right-handed instruction, fluctuation symbol, etc. Is configured to be displayed repeatedly and alternately at the same time, but it is limited to this as a mode for displaying information on the progress of the game (right strike, stay stage, etc.) to the player in the standby demonstration display. I will not. An example of another aspect in the standby demonstration display will be described as an eighth embodiment, and only differences from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 78 is a flowchart of standby demonstration display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fifth) of FIG. 67 in the eighth embodiment. The difference from the fifth embodiment is steps 2457 (eighth) and 2463 (eighth), that is, in step 2456, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying a standby demonstration display. Thereafter, in step 2457 (eighth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying notification effect during standby demonstration, and shifts to step 2458. Here, the notification effect during standby demonstration is an effect displayed simultaneously with the standby demonstration display and the standby demonstration background, and is displayed in a mode different from various notification images (for example, the character has an arrow pointing to the right) It is an effect to be done. The first notification image and the second notification image are configured to be displayed in front of (layer of) the standby demo display and the standby demo background in display control. In addition, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for erasing the display of the standby demonstration display in step 2462, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is notified of a demonstration effect during standby demonstration in step 2463 (eighth). A command to clear the display is set, and the process moves to step 2464.

  Next, FIG. 79 is an example of a waiting demo image in the eighth embodiment. First, on the left side of the figure, under the situation where the second notification image is displayed in the time-saving gaming state, the variation of the decorative symbol is ended, and the lost symbol is stopped. Next, when 180 seconds have elapsed while the player has not executed the game (such as operating the launch handle D44), the standby demo display (in this example, "standby" is displayed) and the standby demo background (this example) Then, the night background is displayed, and the display of the decorative symbol is not visible, but the second notification image is visible. In addition, notification demonstration during stand-by demonstration is displayed, and it is suggested that it is a situation where right-handed driving should be performed. Next, it is determined that execution of the game has been performed by the game ball entering the second main game start port B10 (by detecting the game ball entering the second main game start port B10), The standby demonstration display, the standby demonstration background, and the notification demonstration effect during standby demonstration are erased, and the display of the decorative symbol and the second notification image can be visually recognized. It should be noted that it is determined whether or not to display a warning display (for example, the fifth notification image) even during a stand-by demonstration (a period in which a stand-by demonstration display, a stand-by demonstration background, and a stand-by demonstration notification effect can be displayed). The fifth notification image may be displayed when the condition for displaying the warning display is satisfied, and the fifth notification image is a standby demonstration image (if it is configured as such. It may be configured to give priority to a standby demo display or an image displayed during a standby demo such as a standby demo background) (a fifth notification image may have a higher display priority than a standby demo image). . In the eighth embodiment, the display of the standby demonstration image is ended by the game ball entering the second main game start opening B10, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display device SG Since it is sufficient to terminate the display of the stand-by demonstration image at the timing at which the inconvenience occurs if the player can not visually recognize the effect display by deleting the stand-by demonstration image, the display to the first main game starting opening A10 The display of the stand-by demonstration image may be ended upon entering the game ball or the like, and when the end condition of the stand-by demonstration image display satisfies the display start condition of the fifth notification image Alternatively, the display of the fifth notification image may be started together with the deletion of the standby demonstration image.

  By configuring as described above, it is possible to inform the player of the current state of the gaming machine (in particular, the state related to the right strike or the left strike) even while the standby demonstration effect is being executed. Become. Note that when right-handed and left-handed are informed by voice simultaneously, the voice output may be configured to be for standby demonstration display (power saving mode, for example, the volume is reduced). Also, in a situation where a left hit should be instructed, unlike a situation where a right hit should be indicated, a non-probable fluctuation gaming state and a non-time shortening game are generally used as a game state when starting a game at a game store Since the state is set to the state, the first notification image, the second notification image, or the notification effect during the waiting demonstration may not be displayed during the waiting demonstration display, and the attraction effect in the waiting demonstration effect may be enhanced. . In addition, these display control may be performed by a display priority by providing a several layer, and you may control by terminating and / or starting display or presentation. When at least the first notification image and the second notification image can be displayed as the notification image, that is, when the notification image can be displayed in a plurality of types, at least one notification image is on standby during standby demonstration display. It may be configured to be higher than the display priority of the demonstration screen. In addition, in a situation where a notification image regarding right-handed driving is displayed, the waiting demo may be configured not to be displayed, and in such a configuration, any of the notification images regarding right-handed driving provided with a plurality of types In the situation where it is displayed, it may be configured not to display the waiting demo, or while the waiting demo is not displayed in the situation where a notification image is displayed among the notification images related to the right strike provided in plural types, the certain notification In a situation where a notification image other than an image is displayed, the standby demo may be displayed.

The ninth embodiment
As described above, as processing on the side of the sub control board S, a command from the side of the main control board M (in particular, whether it is a command related to right or left) and After comparing the information related to the notification image (whether it is a notification image related to a right-handed instruction display or a notification image related to a left-handed instruction display), the processing on the sub-sub side performs a command on the effect display device SG Is configured to transmit information, and information is not generated on the information on the gaming state on the main control board M side and the command on the sub-sub side, but is not limited to this, information on the main control board M side Another aspect of the configuration for preventing a wrinkle between (the game state etc.) and the command to the effect display device SG on the sub-sub side is the difference from the fifth example as the ninth example. of It will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 80 is a view showing the basic structure of the front side of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. The difference with the fifth embodiment is that the upper end of the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG partially overlaps with the player as viewed from the player, and the movable body character YK on the player side of the center decoration D38 Is a point that is provided.

  Next, FIG. 81 is a main flowchart of the sub control substrate S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the ninth embodiment. First, the difference with the sixth embodiment is step 2700 (the ninth) and step 2950 (the ninth), that is, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the special game related display control process. After that, in step 2700 (ninth), a firing position notification control process, which will be described later, is executed. Further, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the stay stage determination process in step 2750 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S drives movable body part objects described later in step 2950 (ninth). Control processing is performed, and the process moves to step 2020.

  Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of a firing position notification control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (ninth) of FIG. 81 in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 2749-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the contents of a symbol variation display start instruction command (a command related to the current gaming state) received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 2749-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the gaming state in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Next, in step 2749-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the content of the release instruction command received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 2749-4, the CPUSC of the sub control board S, based on the contents of the symbol variation display start instruction command and the launch instruction command, as a command to the sub-sub side, information on the gaming state and information on the launch instruction And a notification image display command which is one command including the Next, in step 2749-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the generated notification image display command, and shifts to the next processing {step 2750 (second)}.

  Next, FIG. 83 is a flowchart of the movable body service object drive control process according to the subroutine of step 2950 (ninth) of FIG. 81 in the ninth embodiment. First, in step 2952, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the drive start timing of the movable object has been reached. If Yes in step 2952, in step 2954, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts driving of the movable body part. Next, in step 2956, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the drive completion timing of the movable object has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2956, the CPUSC of the sub control board S ends the driving of the movable body part in step 2958, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2020). On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2952 or at step 2956, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 2020). Note that the drive end of the movable object shown in FIG. 83 is the timing to end the movable object action set as the effect, and the movable object YK in the ninth embodiment is an effect display device After advancing to a position overlapping with a part of the front surface of SG (a position where the overlapping area is large), a predetermined effect operation is performed, and the operation until the operation returns to the initial position is completed. Depending on the type of movable object provided on the game board, the operation does not return to the initial position but moves to another standby position (a position where the area overlapping the effect display device SG is smaller than during effect execution). If it is, it is possible to set the timing which completes the operation | movement which moves to an initial position or another waiting position as a timing of drive completion. In addition, after moving to the initial position or another standby position is detected by a sensor or the like, it may be set to execute an operation to move or hold the movable body part YK to a more optimal position. In these cases, the position of the movable body part YK can be confirmed at the time when it is detected by the sensor, so even if all the processing related to the operation of the movable body part YK is not completed, it is detected by the sensor Control may be performed to determine that the timing is the timing at which the operation of the movable body part YK for performing another control has ended.

Next, FIG. 84 is an example of a notification image display command according to the ninth embodiment. Here, the command transmitted from the sub main board to the sub sub board is composed of a first command (8 bits) indicating the type of the command and a second command (8 bits) indicating the processing content defined for each type. Be done. Although the first command of the notification image display command is not illustrated in the figure, 8-bit fixed data indicating that it is instruction information regarding notification image display is transmitted. On the other hand, the second command of the notification image display command is, as shown in the upper part of the figure, first composed of 8-bit information consisting of 8 alphanumeric characters, of which 2 bits corresponding to the alphanumeric character "A" Corresponds to the information on the state of the game, and the three bits corresponding to the alphanumeric character "B" correspond to the information on the launch instruction. Next, as shown in the middle of the figure, the following four pieces of information can be cited as an example of information relating to the state of the game according to the alphanumeric character "A".
[Information on game status (A)]
1. Non-probability variation non-time-short: Information indicating that non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, 2. Non-probable variation time short: Information indicating that the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are selected, 3. Certain variation: Information indicating that it is a probability variation gaming state, 4. During demonstration: Information indicating that a standby demonstration is in progress. Also, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the following eight pieces of information can be given as an example of information relating to the emission instruction related to the alphanumeric character "B".
[Information on Launch Instruction (B)]
1. Non-display (deletion of display): used to delete the displayed notification image; First notification image (left hit): an image having a large display area related to left hit, 3. First informing image (right-handed): an image in which a display area related to right-handed is large; Second notification image (left hit): an image with a small display area related to left hit, 5. Second notification image (right-handed): an image with a small display area related to right-handed, 6. Second notification image, feature avoidance notification image (right-handed): an image displayed while the movable object is moving, Notification image during demonstration (left-handed): an image related to left-handed displayed during stand-by demonstration, 8. Notification image during demonstration (right-handed): Image regarding right-handling displayed during standby demonstration

  As described above, by transmitting the information (A) on the game state and the information (B) on the launch instruction as the same command, a time lag by instructing the image display with different commands, and during the time lag It is possible to prevent a situation in which consistency between the effect image relating to the game state and the image relating to the launch instruction can not be obtained due to the game state being changed. In addition, two images of the second notification image (right-handed) and the feature avoidance notification image (right-handed) are displayed at No. 6 of the information (B) relating to the launch instruction, and the second notification image is Since a bonus feature avoidance notification image (right-handed) is displayed in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG that does not overlap with the drive area of the bonus even if the partial view becomes difficult due to the drive. It is visible that the player should hit the right even while driving the character. In addition, while the second notification image is displayed while the bonus is being driven, the present invention is not limited to this, and while the bonus is being driven, the second notification image is erased and the bonus avoidance notice image is displayed. Alternatively, when two notification images are displayed at the time of driving a bonus product, three notification images may be displayed by further displaying a bonus object notification image.

  In addition, it is not limited to this example to the aspect of these alerting | reporting image display commands. For example, the number of bits relating to a notification image display command is increased (for example, 8-bit data is transmitted three times, and the upper 4-bit data of 1 8-bit data and the lower 4-bit data are connected with the other 2 8-bit data To generate a first command and a second command of 12 bits, or transmit information of 16 bits to 32 bits at a time to collectively transmit the first command and the second command, etc.) This makes it possible to diversify and display the form of the notification image displayed on the effect display device SG, and to change the display position of the notification image according to the game state and the effect display content (to be easily visible), and You can also As an example of such additional information, the display position of the notification image can be determined by the processing on the side of the sub control board S. For example, display position indication information such as (1) normal position, (2) upper left, (3) upper right, (4) center, etc. can be added using a 2-bit area, and more detailed depending on the number of bits Position setting is possible. In addition to position information, addition of information on magnification (30%, 50%, 100%, 200%, etc.), and another notification image (for example, right-handed, left-handed, non-right of the fourth notification image displayed constantly) By adding information on the specification of the display content to “display”, it is possible to change the display size or simultaneously switch the display of a plurality of notification images (or intentionally shift the timing). The control for shifting the display timing for a plurality of images is considered in consideration of the notification content that was on the appearance of the effect and the notification content that was in the gaming state on the main control board M side. It is. In addition, a special display may be provided in the big hit start demonstration and the big hit end demo, and the display mode may be changed to the special display when the number of consecutive times reaches a predetermined number or more. In addition, it is possible to add with or without information by voice as information.

  Next, FIG. 85 is an example of a bonus item notification image image according to the ninth embodiment. First, from the upper left of the figure, in the time-saving gaming state, the variation of the decorative symbol is started, and the second notification image (right-handed) is displayed. Next, the movable body character YK descends to a position overlapping with the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, and the second notification image becomes difficult to be recognized, and at the same time, The object avoidance notification image is displayed at a position that does not overlap (visible) with the movable object. Next, when the reach is started and the movable body role product YK rises to a position not overlapping the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, and the second notification image becomes visible, the lower left character object avoidance notification image Will be erased. Next, as a stop symbol of the symbol variation, the "7" symbol stops, and then the special game starts. Note that the aspect of the notification image is not limited to this example, and for example, the bonus image may be the same as that of the second notification image. In addition, as timing to display or erase the feature avoidance notice image, the number of effect frames is counted, and the fact that the movable object has returned to the initial position or that the movable position is reached is detected by the sensor. It may be configured to be executed based on this. In addition, since it is also possible that the movable body part is stopped due to an error during operation when the part avoidance notification image is displayed, the part avoidance notice image is a movement locus of the movable part (operation range It is preferable to provide a display position (a display position in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG) at a position not overlapping with.

  By configuring as described above, in the ninth embodiment, a new command is generated based on the information on the main control board M side (the state regarding gaming) and the firing instruction command held on the sub control board S side. (A notification image display command) is generated and transmitted to the effect display device SG by processing on the sub-sub side, so that display with various display positions and display modes can be executed more reliably. As a result, the player can easily recognize the progress of the game, and the interest can be enhanced. In addition, an error occurs in the movable object, and the target movable object does not operate (error of the object itself, error of the object that interferes with the object, etc.) When the sub main board recognizes it as management information, the sub sub board controls the sub sub board to execute effects in a mode that does not perform control of a character object avoidance notification image or image effect display accompanying movement of a character The command may be transmitted, and when an error occurs in the current operation, the normal operation can not be executed (such as when the operation does not return to the initial position even if the return operation or the retry operation is performed). In order to surely and visually notify the position (direction) where the game ball should be fired, the feature avoidance notification image may be controlled to be output as it is or to be output again.

  Next, FIG. 86 is an image diagram showing an example of an aspect of a notification image according to the present example. In the figure, although an example concerning right-handed instruction | indication was shown, naturally it is applicable also to left-handed. From the upper left of the figure, an image of a simple arrow pointing to the right, an image by gradation (the gradation may be moved by animation), dot display, and from the left in the middle of the figure, attach textures of multiple colors to the arrow image An image (a texture may be moved to the right by animation), an image in which a character (a character indicating a right strike) is attached to an arrow with a two-color grid pattern, from the lower left of FIG. An image is shown in which a character pointing to the right is attached with an arrow pointing to the right, and an image in which the character has a display facing to the right. The display mode of these instruction displays is not limited to this example, and any image (including an animation) that displays that a right-handed instruction is given can be applied to this example. In addition, as the display mode of these images, the player makes the display position different according to the contents of the instruction to hit the left or the right (for example, when instructing the left strike, the upper left of the effect display device SG) Can intuitively understand the contents of the instruction notification (whether to hit the right or to hit the left). In addition, in the case of an incorrect launch mode (or in the case where a game is not performed), a proactive notification mode (displaying a large image, changing the color to be noticeable, or raising the lamp brightness) Or to increase the sound volume). Furthermore, in spite of executing warning notification (notification when firing the game ball to the wrong launch position), the notification mode is further emphasized when not following it. It is also good (accelerate animation speed, increase lamp brightness, expand display area, further increase sound volume etc). In addition, it may be configured to make the player reliably perceive by other vibration (for example, by vibrating the frame object or vibrating the firing handle D44). Further, the display mode (color, character, etc.) may be made different depending on the game state (probability fluctuation game state, etc.). As for the determination as to whether or not enhancement of the notification effect is to be performed when the alert notification is being performed, conditions for determining to perform the alert notification may be similarly used (for example, the notification execution determination) After resetting the counter, based on the judgment whether the conditions for the judgment value are satisfied again), a judgment criterion may be provided separately (for example, cumulatively added from the notification execution condition and the emphasis stage is reached When emphasizing control).

  In addition, although the example of the alerting | reporting image which attached the pattern which consists of two colors shown to the middle in the same figure was shown, when a notification image is represented by two or more colors in this way, the player has color vision abnormality It is preferable to use a color combination that is easy to distinguish. By using such a notification image (for example, display by an arrow or a character string), a larger number of players can clearly recognize an instruction by the notification image. In particular, it is preferable to use the aspect in warning notification (information by the first notification image or the second notification image and notification when the gaming ball is fired at the wrong launch position). Here, with a combination of easily distinguishable colors, for example, in the case of two colors, warm colors (preferably with a hue of 1 to 8 and more preferably with a hue of 3 to 5) and cold colors (preferably with a hue of The hue is a combination of 13 to 19, more preferably 8 to 15). When the colors constituting the notification image are a combination of colors that are easily distinguishable for a player having at least two or more color vision abnormalities, notification contents by the notification image can be clearly recognized. It is preferable that the at least two or more colors be attached in such a manner that the information to be notified can be identified (for example, a cold-colored system is attached to a figure with a warm-colored system). Arrow is drawn). In addition, although it is expressed as two colors for convenience, as described above, expression by plural colors (gradation expression etc.) may be used in a range of appropriate hue as a combination, and it is expressed by colors of two or more systems It may be considered to be able to improve the identifiability.

Moreover, the following aspects are mentioned as another aspect which improves the identifiability of a alerting | reporting image and enables recognition. First, combinations of colors that are likely to be difficult to distinguish are (Ai, Bi).
・ First combination of difficult-to-distinguish colors (A1, B1) = (green, red)
・ The second combination of difficult-to-distinguish colors (A2, B2) = (blue, pale color)
・ The third combination of difficult-to-distinguish colors (A3, B3) = (red, pale color)

  When a combination of these difficult-to-distinguish colors is included in the notification image, the color of Ai can be converted to a color other than Bi (for example, yellow) to be displayed for easy identification. . Specifically, when it is difficult for the player to see the notification image, the operation means for effect (a cross switch, a production lever, a sub-input button such as a effect button, or the like provided on a game machine) are displayed ) Allows you to change to a color that is easy to view (such as displaying a sample image on the setting screen and selecting Ci that is more easily visible by the conversion), etc. It is good also as composition. The setting may be applied only to a notification image (in particular, a warning notification image), or may be applied to one that changes a motif such as a background display or a decoration frame arranged at a corner of a display screen. By doing this, it becomes possible to change and set the distinctiveness of the notification image as a part of customizing the motif of the effect instead of changing the color. In addition, based on this customization, it is good also as what can be changed according to a setting to the presentation mode which shows the game result performed during symbol change.

  The notification image may be configured to be compatible with multiple languages. For example, on the menu screen, the notification image in multiple languages can be set (during the stand-by demonstration, the fact that the setting of display in other languages is possible is displayed in a plurality of compatible languages). When other languages are set, it is configured to replace the display language related to the Japanese language for presentation and the recommended launch position with a language that corresponds to the language during the reach or jackpot, or to be written in Japanese. can do. At the same time, a system voice (for example, a voice “Please hit right!”, Which is output simultaneously with a notification image related to right strike) may be replaced with the corresponding language. In addition, for an image (for example, "right-handed!") For notifying the user's intention, even if the language is not set (as an initial setting), an English notification image (for example, "Please launch on the right side" In addition, voices to inform the user of the strike (for example, "Please hit right!") Are displayed simultaneously under the situation where other language settings are made. When the notification image to be displayed is highlighted (for example, the display of a relatively large notification image when the instruction by the notification image is not followed), the sound notification may be output in the set language.

  In addition, when it detects a game progress that does not follow the notification image, such as detecting a left hit during display of the notification image instructing a right-handling, the notification is emphasized (notified in the notification mode at the time of irregular) When configured, for example, during a period in which the symbol pattern does not reach reach or in a period in which the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped (period before the temporary stop), the highlighted notification is executed, and in the period While it is configured not to execute the lottery of the effect to be performed, the period after reaching during symbol fluctuation and the period after temporary stop (as symbol fluctuation is executed more than once in one symbol fluctuation as well) During a period when effects that are important for whether or not the symbol variation will be a big hit, such as a period after the temporary suspension in a pseudo continuous variation that is a variation of a decorative symbol that performs temporary suspension showing multiple times It may be configured to be able to run the lottery of output. In such a case, even when the condition for executing the notification mode (alert display) at the time of irregular is satisfied during a certain fluctuation period, the notification is not started during the fluctuation period, and execution is continuously performed. It is preferable to perform notification at the start of the next symbol change to be performed and to change the effect lottery mode. In addition, even when the conditions for executing the notification mode at the time of irregular are satisfied, detection of the emission at an appropriate emission position (reception of various ball entry signals etc.) until the next fluctuation is started. Alternatively, it may be considered that the execution condition of the warning display is updated to the non-established state by clocking of a timer provided appropriately, such as transition to a demonstration screen.

Other Modifications
In this example, the big hit start demonstration command transmitted at the start of the big hit (small hit) may be configured to be different depending on the big hit (small hit) symbol, and the period in which the notification image is displayed is big hit (small It is also possible to change according to the design. In this configuration, the sub main transmits to the sub sub the command to execute the effect even at the big hit start corresponding to the received big hit start command, but the command related to the firing position (notice image display command) The information for selecting the type of display (the part (B) shown in FIG. 84) is the same, and the configuration for displaying the first notification image is almost the same (the displayed object is the same. Although they are identical, they may be different in position, size, timing, etc.

  In addition, it is preferable that the alert notification display (for example, the fifth notification image) is more aggressive (in the large display area SG10) than the normal guidance notification (for example, the second notification image). However, in addition, when warning notification display is performed, it is possible to replace the effect (change the lottery table and the result). That is, when the importance of notification is higher (warning notification), priority may be given to notification to the player as a negative aspect of the effect.

  In addition, also at the time of reach production development in time shortening game state etc, the information which can distinguish the number of reservations separately from 1st suspension indicator area SG12 and 2nd suspension indicator area SG13 the territory of the corner of effect indicator SG (for example As, for example, time display game as always displaying in the vicinity of the display area of the fourth notification image the number of first main game side held and the number of second main game side held as numbers etc.) Even if it is necessary to delete the second notification image (right-handed) in the state by the effect etc., the display of the distinction (for example, the fourth notification image) and the display of the number of reservations are always displayed. , It becomes possible for the player to judge whether it is a situation to increase the hold or a situation to stop the firing of the gaming ball.

  Also, in the case where the premier notice (big hit confirmation notification) is configured to be executable, for example, if the premier notice is executed in the normal gaming state (a gaming state that becomes a left strike recommendation such as a non-time shortening gaming state), [5] Even if the requirement for warning notification (left-handed notification) pertaining to the notification image etc. is satisfied, then it is decided to shift to the gaming state to be the right-handed recommendation, so the notification (For example, until the symbol change relating to the premier notice is canceled) may not be executed.

  In addition, for example, when the big winning opening such as the middle of the first round or the small hit middle in the 7 round big hit (6 rounds with popped out) according to the big hit symbol “9A” in the second embodiment If the right-handed game is not substantially advantageous such as during operation of the second main game start-up electric character in a situation where the open extension function is not activated, the first main even if it detects a left-handed Since there is an advantage that a jackpot lottery right can be acquired accompanying entering the game starting opening, the warning notification may not be executed. In this case, in the seven round big hit, it may be determined that a warning can be given when a left hit is detected after two rounds. In addition, even in the case where it is configured to display a warning notification by detecting a left-handed game during the time-saving game state (when right-handed game is recommended), the non-time-shortened game state In the case where the second main game start opening is opened by the winning of the auxiliary game symbol, warning notification may not be executed even if a game by left hitting is detected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the launch instruction command is configured to be transmitted to the sub control board S at various timings, but as a configuration of the launch instruction command, for example, the game state of the auxiliary gaming side is provided. The data relating to whether the game time reduction game state (power support state) or the auxiliary game non-time reduction game state (non-power support state) may be used to generate a firing instruction command, or the stop of the lost symbol It may be configured to be able to transmit from the main control board M side to the sub control board S side at the same time. In addition to using the launch instruction command at the display start timing of the notification image, the content of the launch instruction command may be referred to at the display end timing of the notification image.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the additional configurations shown in the above embodiments are of course added to these concepts, as well as the combination and separation (superordinate conceptization) of these listed concepts. May be

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (1) is
A plurality of ball entry ports (for example, first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10) in which the game ball can enter and are provided in the game area (for example, game area D30);
A first firing strength that enables the game balls to be fired toward the game area (for example, the game area D30) and allows the game balls to be released to the game area (for example, the game area D30) And a game ball launcher (e.g., a launcher D42) capable of at least a second launch strength capable of delivering a game ball to the game area with a large launch strength (e.g., the game field D30). There are formed a first flow-down route in which gaming balls fired at a first firing intensity flow down, and a second flow-down route in which gaming balls fired at a second firing intensity flow down,
Among the plurality of ball entrances (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10), it is provided on the first flow-down route (in other words, it is fired at the first firing intensity) The first entry ball slot (for example, the first main game start) that the game ball can enter the ball or is easy to enter, and the game ball fired with the second launch intensity becomes unable to enter or difficult to enter the ball Mouth A10),
Among the plurality of ball entrances (for example, the first main game start port A10, the second main game start port B10), it is provided on the second flow-down route (in other words, it is launched at the second firing intensity A game ball that can enter the ball or is easy to enter, and the game ball fired at the first firing strength can not enter the ball or it becomes difficult to enter a second entrance (for example, the second main game start) Mouth B10),
The game information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) capable of fluctuating display and stop display of the identification information according to the progress of the game and capable of displaying the game information superimposed on the identification information;
It is configured to be able to adopt a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which entering a second entrance (for example, the second main game start port B10) is easier than the normal gaming state.
In the case of the specific gaming state, it is possible to display a notification image, which is game information that can be notified that the game ball is fired at the second firing intensity, on the game information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). The notification image includes a first notification image occupying a predetermined display area and a second notification image occupying a display area smaller than the first notification image,
While the first notification image is displayed in the specific gaming state and satisfies the predetermined display condition, the second notification image does not satisfy the predetermined display condition in the specific gaming state. Is also configured to be displayed,
During at least a part of the period during which the identification information is variably displayed, the display priority order on the game information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is the first notification image, the second notification image, The display priority order on the game information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is second during at least a part of the period during which the identification information is ordered while the identification information is stopped and displayed. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be in the order of the notification image, the identification information, and the first notification image.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (2) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of variably displaying and stopping the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of variable display and stop display of the second identification information;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means (for example, the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A), the acquired first until the fluctuation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, first main game symbol holding means MJ 32-A) which temporarily stores random numbers and controls so that the first suspension occurs;
In the case where the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding the first hold is satisfied, the first hold is digested and the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display stop identification information after fluctuating display of the first identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start opening (for example, second main game start opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ 21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. Second random number temporary storage means (for example, second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B) which temporarily stores a random number and controls so that a second hold occurs;
In the case where the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the certain second hold is digested and the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop display of the stop identification information after fluctuating display of the second identification information;
The stop identification information displayed on the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) or the stop identification information on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when the stop identification information is a second stop mode different from the first stop mode or the first stop mode In the case where the special game is not executed, and the first identification information and the second identification information are not variably displayed, the variation display of the first identification information is started when the second hold exists. While the condition is not satisfied, the variable display start condition of the second identification information can be satisfied regardless of whether or not the first hold exists, and the special game according to the first stop mode is executed The place where it was done Person in the case where the special game according to the second stop mode has been performed than is being configured to obtain be advantageous for the player,
When a certain first hold occurs anew, the hold information about the first random number related to the certain first hold before satisfying the variable display start condition of the first identification information on the certain first hold Can be transmitted to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S), and when a certain second hold occurs, it is preferable to satisfy the variable display start condition of the second identification information regarding the certain second hold. Before, it is configured to be able to transmit to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) suspension information regarding the second random number related to the second suspension.
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
After the first identification information or the second identification information is variably displayed until it is stopped and displayed as the fluctuation unit,
When the first condition including at least the presence of the predetermined number of undigested second reserves is satisfied, the period until the number of repetitions of the fluctuation unit reaches the predetermined number during the period The second stop mode may be stopped and displayed while the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is configured to be able to display an effect that the first stop mode is not stopped and displayed during the period. Yes,
When the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied, the second stop mode may be stopped and displayed during the period until the number of repetitions of the variation unit reaches the specific number. On the other hand, during the period, the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is configured to be able to display an effect that the first stop mode is not stopped and displayed, and the specific number is more than the predetermined number It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be able to increase the number.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A1) is
A game ball which is capable of entering the game ball, which is disposed at a position where the game ball flowing down the second area side is easier to enter than the game ball which flows down the first area side (for example, 2 main game start port B10),
An identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying identification information;
And an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on entering the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10);
Identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display identification information after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition unit When,
And a special game control means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group,
As the gaming state, it is configured to be able to adopt a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which entry to the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is easier than in the normal gaming state.
An information display unit (for example, a notification image A capable of notifying that the game ball is to be emitted toward the second area side when the gaming state is switched, the special game is started, or the special game is ended) It can be displayed for a predetermined time on the effect display device SG),
When the game state is switched, the special game is started, or the special game is ended, the notification image B that can be notified that the game ball is fired toward the first area side is displayed as an information display unit (for example, It is possible to display on the effect display device SG), and when the notification image B is displayed, the gaming state is switched again, the special game is started, or the notification image B is continued until the special game is ended. Are configured to be able to display
An information display unit (for example, a notification image C capable of notifying that the game ball is fired toward the second area side when the gaming state is switched, the special game is started, or the special game is ended) When the notification image C is displayed, the game state is switched again, the special game is started, or the notification image C is continued until the special game is ended. Are configured to be able to display
The display area occupied by the notification image A is larger than the display area occupied by the notification image B, and the display area occupied by the notification image A is larger than the display area occupied by the notification image C. Pachinko It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A2) is
A ball entry port where the game ball can enter the ball, the game ball flowing down the second area side being disposed at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down the first area side 2nd main game start opening B10),
A first speaker (for example, a speaker left D24L) capable of outputting sound and provided at a position closer to the first region than the second region;
A second speaker (for example, a speaker right D24R) capable of outputting sound and provided at a position closer to the second region than the first region;
And an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
As the gaming state, it is configured to be able to adopt a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which entering the ball entrance (for example, the second main game start port B10) is easier than the normal gaming state.
In the case of the specific gaming state, it is possible to display a notification image, which is game information that can be notified to shoot the game ball toward the second area side, on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), The notification image includes a first notification image occupying a predetermined display area and a second notification image occupying a display area smaller than the first notification image,
While the first notification image is displayed in the specific gaming state and satisfies the predetermined display condition, the second notification image does not satisfy the predetermined display condition in the specific gaming state. Is also configured to be displayed,
When the second notification image is displayed, sound can be output only from the second speaker (for example, the speaker right D24R), while when the first notification image is displayed, the first speaker (for example, the speaker left D24L) And a second speaker (e.g., the right speaker D24R).

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A3) is
A game ball which is capable of entering the game ball, which is disposed at a position where the game ball flowing down the second area side is easier to enter than the game ball which flows down the first area side (for example, 2 main game start port B10),
A game winning ball in which the game area flowing down on the second area side is located at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down on the first area side. For example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20),
An identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying identification information;
And an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on entering the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10);
Identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display identification information after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition unit When,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, whether or not there is a predetermined number of entry into the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) A special game capable of executing a special game that can make a unit game advantageous for the player to make a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) advantageous until a predetermined period has elapsed And control means,
As the gaming state, it is configured to be able to adopt a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which entry to the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting port B10) is easier than in the normal gaming state.
While the special game is being executed, a notification image capable of notifying that the game ball is emitted toward the second area can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The display mode of the notification image includes at least a first mode and a second mode which is a display mode different from the first mode,
When the display of the notification image is started during the special game, the display mode of the notification image is displayed in the first mode, and the predetermined number is displayed when the notification image is displayed in the first mode. The notification image is configured to be displayed in the second mode in response to entry into the less variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A4) is
A game ball flowing down the second area side is disposed at a position where entering the ball is easier than a game ball flowing down the first area side, a main game starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, , 2nd main game start opening B10),
It is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) which is attached to the main game start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) and which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state. When it is shifted to the state, it is easier to enter the game ball in the main game start slot (for example, the second main game start slot B10) as compared to the possible or closed state of the game ball, and when it is shifted to the closed state the main game start slot (For example, the second main game start opening B10) The variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter the game ball compared to the ball entry impossible or open state ,
The game ball flowing down the second area side is located at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down the first area side , Auxiliary game start port H10),
A main game identification information display section capable of displaying main game identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
An auxiliary game identification information display section (for example, an auxiliary game symbol display section H21g) capable of displaying the auxiliary game identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An auxiliary gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) supporting a main game,
An information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling information display on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Main game random number acquiring means for acquiring a main game random number based on entering a ball into the main game start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10);
When the main game random number is obtained by the main game random number obtaining means, the obtained main game random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the main game identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the main game hold occurs. Main game random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the main game identification information related to a certain main game hold is satisfied, the main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determined content based on the main game random number Main game identification information display control means for controlling the main game identification information to be stopped and displayed after the main game identification information is variably displayed on the display section B21g);
After the main game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the special game control means capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player and the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for displaying information to be executed to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side,
The auxiliary game unit (for example, the main control board M)
Auxiliary game random number acquiring means for acquiring an auxiliary game random number, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start opening (for example, the auxiliary game start opening H10);
When an auxiliary game random number is acquired by the auxiliary game random number acquisition means, the auxiliary game random number acquired is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the auxiliary identification information is satisfied, and the control to control the auxiliary game hold to occur Game random number temporary storage means,
When the variable display start condition of the auxiliary game identification information regarding the auxiliary game hold is satisfied, the auxiliary game identification information display unit (for example, the auxiliary game symbol display unit according to the determination content based on the auxiliary game random number related to the auxiliary game hold H. 21 g) auxiliary game identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the auxiliary game identification information after variably displaying the auxiliary game identification information;
After the auxiliary game identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the specific group, within a displacement drive period, which is a period during which the variable member (for example, the second main game start port electric role B11 d) can be displaced, Perform an easy entry ball game in which the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) is displaced from the closed state to the open state and then displaced to the closed state one or more times It is equipped with easy entry ball game decision execution expedient,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
The information display content control means for controlling the information display content to be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means,
An information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) can display a notification image that can notify that the game ball is to be emitted toward the second area side,
The display mode of the notification image includes at least a first mode and a second mode which is a display mode different from the first mode,
When displaying a notification image, it is configured to be able to determine based on the number of main game holdings or the number of auxiliary game holdings whether to display the notification image in which display mode of the first mode or the second mode. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A5) is
A ball entry port where the game ball can enter the ball, the game ball flowing down the second area side being disposed at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down the first area side General prize winning opening P10),
And an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
As a gaming state, it is configured to be able to take a specific gaming state in which entering the ball entrance (for example, general winning opening P10) is easier than in the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state.
In the case of the specific gaming state, it is possible to display a notification image, which is game information that can be notified to shoot the game ball toward the second area side, on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The notification image is characterized in that it is configured to include an image of a graphic formed of a combination of at least two or more easily distinguishable colors or an image of a character string formed of a combination of at least 2 or more easily distinguishable colors. It is a pachinko game machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A6) is
A game ball which is capable of entering the game ball, which is disposed at a position where the game ball flowing down the second area side is easier to enter than the game ball which flows down the first area side (for example, 2 main game start port B10),
A game winning ball in which the game area flowing down on the second area side is located at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down on the first area side. For example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20),
An identification information display section (for example, a second main game symbol display section B21g) capable of displaying identification information;
And an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
Random number obtaining means for obtaining a random number based on entering the starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10);
Identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display identification information after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition unit When,
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, whether or not there is a predetermined number of entry into the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) A special game capable of executing a special game that can make a unit game advantageous for the player to make a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) advantageous until a predetermined period has elapsed And control means,
While the special game is being executed, a notification image capable of notifying that the game ball is emitted toward the second area can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The display mode of the notification image includes at least a first mode and a second mode which is a display mode different from the first mode,
When the number of balls entered into a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) is less than a specific number which is less than the predetermined number during execution of a unit game The display mode of the notification image in the case of displaying the notification image at the time of execution of the unit game which is the next execution time of the certain unit game is the first mode.
If the number of balls entered into a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 or the second large winning opening C20) during execution of a unit game is equal to or more than the specific number, the unit game A display mode of the notification image in the case of displaying a notification image at the time of execution of a unit game to be executed next time is configured to be a second mode.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A7) is
A ball entry port where the game ball can enter the ball, the game ball flowing down the second area side being disposed at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down the first area side 2nd main game start opening B10),
A launch handle (eg, launch handle D44) capable of adjusting the launch intensity of the gaming ball;
A handle operation detection unit capable of detecting an operation on a launch handle (for example, the launch handle D44);
And an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
It is possible to display a notification image, which is game information that can be notified to shoot the game ball toward the second area side, on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
As a state relating to the game progress, it has at least a game in progress state in which the game is in progress and a standby state in which the game is not in progress.
In the standby state, predetermined information not displayed in the game state is displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The notification image is not displayed when the handle operation detection unit detects an operation on the launch handle (for example, the launch handle D44) in the game state, while the handle operation detection unit is a launch handle (for example, in the standby state) The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is configured to be able to display a notification image upon detection of an operation on the emission handle D44).

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A8) is
A ball entry port where the game ball can enter the ball, the game ball flowing down the second area side being disposed at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down the first area side General prize winning opening P10),
And an information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
It is possible to display a notification image, which is game information that can be notified to shoot the game ball toward the second area side, on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
As a state relating to the game progress, it has at least a game in progress state in which the game is in progress and a standby state in which the game is not in progress.
In the standby state, predetermined information not displayed in the game state is displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the notification image has a display priority higher than that of the predetermined information, and the notification image can be displayed even while the predetermined information is being displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A9) is
A ball entry port where the game ball can enter the ball, the game ball flowing down the second area side being disposed at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down the first area side 2nd main game start opening B10),
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling information display on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Based on the state of the game, it is possible to generate recommended launch information, which is information related to which of the first area side and the second area side the game ball should be launched,
Game information transmitting means for transmitting the generated recommended launch information to the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S);
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving recommended launch information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the recommended firing information received by the gaming information receiving means, firing the first notification image, which is the game information that can be notified to shoot the gaming ball toward the first area side, and the gaming ball towards the second area side It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured to be able to display a second notification image, which is game information that can be notified so as to be displayed, by an information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG).

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A10) is
A ball entry port where the game ball can enter the ball, the game ball flowing down the second area side being disposed at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down the first area side 2nd main game start opening B10),
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling information display on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Based on the state of the game, it is possible to generate recommended launch information, which is information related to which of the first area side and the second area side the game ball should be launched,
Game information transmitting means for transmitting the generated recommended launch information and information regarding the state of the game to the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S);
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving recommended launch information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) and information on the state of the game;
A first notification image, which is game information that can be notified to shoot the game ball toward the first area side, and a second notification image, which is game information that can be notified to shoot the game ball toward the second area side Can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
The main game unit (for example, the main control board M) is configured to transmit recommended launch information and information on the state of the game to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) at the time of power failure and recovery. ,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) performs the first notification based on the recommended firing information received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) and the information on the gaming state at the time of power failure and recovery. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to determine whether to display an image and whether to display a second notification image.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A11) is
A ball entry port where the game ball can enter the ball, the game ball flowing down the second area side being disposed at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down the first area side 2nd main game start opening B10),
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling information display on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Based on the state of the game, it is possible to generate the main game recommended launch information which is information related to which of the first field side and the second field side should be fired the game ball,
The main game recommended launch information is information related to whether to launch the game sphere to the second area side, which is information related to whether the game sphere should be launched to the first area side and information regarding whether the game sphere should be launched to the second area side At least the second main game recommended launch information,
Game information transmitting means for transmitting the generated main game recommended launch information and information on the state of the game to the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S);
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving the main game recommended launch information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) and information on the state of the game;
Based on the information on the gaming state received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M), a secondary gaming recommendation, which is information related to which of the first area side and the second area side the game ball should be launched Generate and store launch information,
As secondary game recommended launch information, there are first secondary game recommended launch information which is information related to whether to launch the gaming ball to the first area side and information related to whether to launch the gaming ball to the second area side At least a second secondary game recommended launch information;
A first notification image, which is game information that can be notified to shoot the game ball toward the first area side, and a second notification image, which is game information that can be notified to shoot the game ball toward the second area side Can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
When the first main game recommended launch information is received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the first secondary game recommended launch information, the memory Is configured to be able to display a first notification image based on the first secondary game recommended launch information being executed,
When the first main game recommended launch information is received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the second secondary game recommended launch information, the reception Configured to be able to display a first notification image based on the first main game recommended launch information,
When the second main game recommended launch information is received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the second secondary game recommended launch information, the memory Configured to be able to display a second notification image based on the second sub game recommended launch information being executed,
When the second main game recommended launch information is received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the first secondary game recommended launch information, the reception It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to display a second notification image based on the recommended second main game recommended launch information.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A12) is
A ball entry port where the game ball can enter the ball, the game ball flowing down the second area side being disposed at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down the first area side 2nd main game start opening B10),
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling information display on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Based on the state of the game, it is possible to generate the main game recommended launch information which is information related to which of the first field side and the second field side should be fired the game ball,
The main game recommended launch information is information related to whether to launch the game sphere to the second area side, which is information related to whether the game sphere should be launched to the first area side and information regarding whether the game sphere should be launched to the second area side At least the second main game recommended launch information,
Game information transmitting means for transmitting the generated main game recommended launch information and information on the state of the game to the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S);
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving the main game recommended launch information transmitted from the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) and information on the state of the game;
Based on the information on the gaming state received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M), a secondary gaming recommendation, which is information related to which of the first area side and the second area side the game ball should be launched Generate and store launch information,
As secondary game recommended launch information, there are first secondary game recommended launch information which is information related to whether to launch the gaming ball to the first area side and information related to whether to launch the gaming ball to the second area side At least a second secondary game recommended launch information;
A first notification image, which is game information that can be notified to shoot the game ball toward the first area side, and a second notification image, which is game information that can be notified to shoot the game ball toward the second area side Can be displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
When the first main game recommended launch information is received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the first secondary game recommended launch information, the memory Is configured to be able to display a first notification image based on the first secondary game recommended launch information being executed,
When the first main game recommended launch information is received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the second secondary game recommended launch information, the first The notification image and the second notification image are configured to be hidden,
When the second main game recommended launch information is received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the second secondary game recommended launch information, the memory Configured to be able to display a second notification image based on the second sub game recommended launch information being executed,
When the second main game recommended launch information is received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) side, if the stored secondary game recommended launch information is the first secondary game recommended launch information, the first A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the notification image and the second notification image are not displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A13) is
The first entry slot where the game ball can enter the ball, the game ball flowing down the first area side being disposed at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down the second area side For example, 1st main game start opening A10),
The second ball entry port where the game ball can enter the ball, the game ball flowing down the second area side being disposed at a position where ball entering is easier than the game ball flowing down the first area side For example, general winning opening P10),
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling information display on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
The first entry ball entry information, which is information about the fact that the ball has entered the first entry slot (for example, the first main game starting slot A10), and the second entry slot (for example, the general winning opening P10) The game information transmission means for transmitting the second ball entry information, which is information regarding the ball, and the information regarding the state of the game to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving first ball entry ball entry information, second ball entry ball entry information, and information regarding the state of the game transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Recommendation firing information which is information related to which of the first area side and the second area side the game ball should be fired based on the information on the gaming state received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) Can be generated and memorized,
As recommended launch information, first recommended launch information that is information related to whether the gaming ball should be launched to the first area side and second recommended launch that is information related to whether the gaming ball should be launched to the second area side And at least information,
When the recommended launch information stored in the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) is the first recommended launch information, the second entry ball entry information from the main gaming unit (for example, the primary control board M) The first notification image, which is game information that can be notified that the game ball should be fired toward the first area side when the predetermined condition is satisfied, is displayed on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) Configured to display at
When the recommended launch information stored in the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) is the second recommended launch information, the first entry ball entry information from the main gaming section (for example, the primary control board M) Of the second notification image, which is game information that can be notified to shoot the game ball toward the second area side when the specific condition is satisfied, and the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) Configured to display at
When the first notification image is displayed, a predetermined time elapses after the first notification image is displayed, and the first ball entry information is received from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) Or, it is configured to erase the display of the first notification image by receiving information from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) as information regarding the state of the game that the state of the game has changed. ,
When the second notification image is displayed, the second entry image is received from the main gaming unit (e.g., the main control board M) for which a specific time elapses after the second notification image is displayed. Or, it is configured to erase the display of the second notification image by receiving information from the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) as information about the state of the game that the state of the game has changed. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (A14) is
A ball entry port where the game ball can enter the ball, the game ball flowing down the second area side being disposed at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down the first area side 2nd main game start opening B10),
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying information;
A sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling information display on the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
The game information transmitting means for transmitting information on the state of the game to the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S) side,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving information on the state of the game transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
It is possible to output information on the state of the game to the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
Based on the information on the state of the game, output to the information display unit (for example, effect display device SG) the recommended launch information which is information related to which to launch the gaming ball to the first area side or the second area side Is possible,
When outputting information on the gaming state and the recommended launch information to the information display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the information on the gaming state and the recommended launch information are configured to be output as one command. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

MN11ta-A first main game acceptance lottery table, MN11-B second main game acceptance lottery means MN11ta-B second main game acceptance lottery table, MN11-H auxiliary game acceptance lottery means MN11ta-H auxiliary game acceptance lottery Table, MN20 Special game transition determination means MN41ta-A First main game stop symbol determination lottery table, MN41-B Second main game stop symbol determination means MN41ta-B Second main game stop symbol determination lottery table, MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41ta-H auxiliary gaming symbol determination lottery table, MN50 variation mode determination means MN51-A first main game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-A first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51-B 2Main game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-B Second main game variation mode determination lottery Table MN51-H auxiliary game fluctuation mode determination means, MN51ta-H lottery table MP11t-C for the auxiliary game fluctuation mode determination first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timer, MP22t-B second main game start opening electric role thing Opening timer MP33c Winning ball counter, MP34t Special game timer MP51c Probability counter, MP52c time shorting counter MP61c 1st starting opening ball ratio counter, MP62c General winning hole ball ratio counter MP70c Round ball number counter, MP90t Standby demo timer MP21t First start opening confirmation timer, MP22t General winning opening confirmation timer MP81t Right-handed monitoring timer, MP82t Left-handed monitoring timer MT Information transmission control means, MT10 command transmission buffer A First main game peripheral device, A10 First main game start opening A11s Main game start slot entrance detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st main game symbol display unit, A21h 1st main game symbol hold display unit B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game start opening B11s 2nd main game start slot entering ball detection device, B11d 2nd main game start port electric role B20 2nd main game symbol display device, B21 g 2nd main game symbol display section B21 h 2nd main game symbol hold display section,
C 1st / 2nd main game common peripheral, C10 1st big prize mouth C11s 1st big prize mouth prize detection device, C11d 1st big prize mouth electric role C20 2nd big prize mouth, C21s 2nd big prize mouth Winning detection device C21d 2nd special winning opening motorized combination, C22 specific area C22s specific area entering ball detecting apparatus, C22 c specific area shielding member H auxiliary gaming peripherals, H10 auxiliary game starting port H11s auxiliary gaming starting slot entering ball detection apparatus, H10-1 (-2) auxiliary game start opening H11-1 (-2) s auxiliary game start opening ball detection device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21 g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21 h auxiliary game symbol hold display unit P10 General Prize winning opening, P11 s general winning a prize entrance ball detection device S secondary control board, SM21ta drawing fluctuation determination lottery table SM21t drawing fluctuation time management timer SG effect display , SG10 display area SG11 decoration symbol display area, SG12 first hold display area SG13 second hold display area RTC real time clock, D24 speaker D26 game effect lamp, D44 launch handle D38 center decoration, HS launch indication display area HSL left strike indication HSR Right-handed display D24L Speaker left, D24R Speaker right MN 52c-1 Limited frequency A counter, MN 52c-2 Limited frequency B counter KH Award ball payout control board KE Award ball payout device

Claims (1)

A starting opening disposed in a predetermined game area;
A ball entry port where the game ball can enter the ball, the game ball flowing down the second area side being disposed at a position where the ball entry is easier than the game ball flowing down the first area side,
A main gaming unit that controls the progress of the game;
An information display unit capable of displaying information;
And an auxiliary game unit that controls information display on the information display unit;
The main game club is
In response to entering the starting opening, the special symbol display is executed on the special symbol display device.
A special game can be executed when the special symbol of the predetermined aspect is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device,
Based on the state of the game, it is possible to generate recommended launch information, which is information related to which of the first zone and the second zone should launch the game ball, and send it to the secondary gaming unit,
The secondary gaming unit is
Game information receiving means for receiving recommended launch information transmitted from the main gaming unit;
Based on the recommended firing information received by the gaming information receiving means, firing the first notification image, which is the game information that can be notified to shoot the gaming ball toward the first area side, and the gaming ball towards the second area side The launch position notification control is configured to be executable to display on the information display unit a second notification image that is game information that can be notified to
The main game unit is recommended launching at least once at a time after the variation display of one special symbol is started, and until the variation display of the special symbol to be performed next to the variation display of the one special symbol is started. Generate information and send it to the secondary gaming unit,
The secondary game unit has generated a predetermined game result from the main game unit after the launch position notification control is executed based on the reception of the current recommended launch information until the next recommended launch information is received. Control to make it possible to change the display content in the information display unit related to the first notification image or the second notification image even when the information indicating that the second notification image has been received,
In the case where the secondary gaming unit receives, as the predetermined game result, information relating to the generation of a game result that can be identified as emitting at a position different from the recommended launch position indicated by the recommended launch information received earlier, In the information display unit, the alerting effect relating to the notification content for notifying the player that the recommended launch position is different can be executed.
When the secondary gaming portion changes the display related to the execution of the alerting effect, to the predetermined display mode in which the variable display and the stop display of the decorative symbol, which is the decorative identification information corresponding to the special symbol, change in advance, In the non-display mode ,
The predetermined display mode is configured to include when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the symbol variation in which the pseudo continuous variation effect is executed <br / > A pachinko game machine characterized by

Images